2018 VERSA NOTE
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you un-
derstand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Book-
let explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-
solve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-
der your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to de-
livery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions con-
cerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-
cessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe op-
eration of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for
conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
tures or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-
propriate child restraint systems. Pre-
teen children should be seated in the
rear seat.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety, emissions or du-
rability and may even violate govern-
mental regulations. In addition, dam-
age or performance problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-
agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for ex-
ample remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-
ranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your ve-
hicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of pro-
duction, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or in-
stalled on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustra-
tions in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, perfor-
mance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-
cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-
tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-
sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide
. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-
GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or seri-
ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be fol-
lowed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illus-
tration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm.
APD1005
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known
to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the en-
gine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands fre-
quently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon and
Bosch.
SiriusXM® services
require a
subscription after
trial period and are
sold separately or
as a package. The
satellite service is
available only in
the 48 contiguous
USA and DC.
SiriusXM® satellite
service is also
available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
erwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please con-
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone
number
– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the informa-
tion at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumer[email protected]om
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.c[email protected]om
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2
Exterior front ....................................0-3
Exterior rear .....................................0-4
Passenger compartment........................0-5
Instrument panel ................................0-6
Engine compartment check locations ...........0-8
Warning and indicator lights .....................0-9
1. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-6)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
3. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-10, 1-44)
4. Seats (P. 1-2)
5. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-44)
6. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-44)
7. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-44)
8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system (P. 1-23)
9. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LIC3884
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
1. Engine hood (P. 3-26)
2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-25)
3. Windshield (P. 8-16)
4. Mirrors (P. 3-32)
Side camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-17)
5. Power windows (if so equipped)
(P. 2-40)
6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-28)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-28)
Recommended fuel (P. 10-2)
7. Door locks (P. 3-5)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
(if so equipped) (P. 3-12)
Keys (P. 3-2)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-29)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-29)
9. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-28)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-28)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
10. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-28)
11. Front camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-17)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2519
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
1. Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-25)
2. Rear window washer nozzle
(P. 2-25)
3. Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-27)
4. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
6. Interior hatch release (P. 3-27)
7. Rear hatch opener (P. 3-27)
Rearview camera (P. 4-10)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2511
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
1. Cargo cover (if so equipped)
(P. 2-34)
2. Interior lights (P. 2-42)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-31)
4. Map lights (P. 2-43)
5. Rearview mirror (P. 3-32)
6. Glove box (P. 2-34)
7. Parking brake (P. 5-21)
8. Rear armrest (if so equipped) (P. 1-2)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2520
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
1. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-28)
2. Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
Horn (P. 2-31)
3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-25)
5. Vents (P. 4-28)
6. Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-27)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
8. Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-44)
9. Climate control (P. 4-28)
10. Audio system (P. 4-36)
11. Upper glove box (P. 2-34)
12. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
13. Lower glove box (P. 2-34)
14. Upper glove box release handle
(P. 2-34)
15. Power outlet (P. 2-33)
16. Cup holders (P. 2-34)
LIC3759
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
17. USB connection port
(if so equipped) (P. 4-61)
AUX IN jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-61)
18. Shift lever (P. 5-15)
19. Cup holders (P. 2-34)
20. Push-button ignition switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-10)
21. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-8)
22. Cruise control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-22)
23. Tilt steering (P. 3-31)
24. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-81, 4-96, 4-108)
Audio control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 4-36)
Trip computer control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 2-11)
25. Hood release lever (P. 3-26)
26. Fuel-filler door release lever
(P. 3-28)
27. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-33)
28. Outside mirror control switch
(P. 3-33)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
HR16DE engine
1. Drive belt location (P. 8-14)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)
4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)
5. Fusible link (P. 8-18)
6. Battery (P. 8-11)
7. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LDI3055
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Warning
light
Name Page
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
2-15
or
Brake warning
light
2-15
Charge warning
light
2-16
Door open warn-
ing light
2-16
Engine oil pres-
sure warning light
2-16
High temperature
warning light (red)
(if so equipped)
2-16
Warning
light
Name Page
Low fuel warning
light
2-17
Low tire pressure
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-17
Low windshield-
washer fluid
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-19
NISSAN Intelligent
Key® warning light
(if so equipped)
2-19
P position select-
ing warning lights
(if so equipped)
2-19
Power steering
warning light
2-19
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-20
Warning
light
Name Page
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-20
Indicator
light
Name Page
Continuously
Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) po-
sition indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-21
Cruise main
switch indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-21
Cruise set switch
indicator light (if
so equipped)
2-21
Engine start op-
eration indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-21
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Indicator
light
Name Page
Front fog light in-
dicator light (if so
equipped)
2-21
Front passenger
air bag status
light
2-21
High beam indi-
cator light (blue)
2-21
Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)
2-21
Overdrive OFF
indicator light (if
so equipped)
2-22
Security indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-22
Side light and
headlight indica-
tor light (green) (if
so equipped)
2-23
Indicator
light
Name Page
Slip indicator light 2-22
Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights
2-23
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
2-23
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats............................................ 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment ................1-3
Folding rear seat ............................. 1-4
Center armrest (if so equipped)............... 1-5
Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s side
only).......................................... 1-6
Head restraints/headrests ...................... 1-6
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components ..................................1-7
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components.........................1-7
Remove......................................1-8
Install.........................................1-8
Adjust ........................................ 1-9
Seatbelts.......................................1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage ...............1-10
Seat belt warning light........................1-13
Pregnant women.............................1-13
Injured persons...............................1-13
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor .....................................1-13
Seat belt extenders...........................1-19
Seat belt maintenance .......................1-19
Child safety.....................................1-20
Infants .......................................1-21
Small children ................................1-21
Larger children ...............................1-21
Child restraints .................................1-23
Precautions on child restraints ..............1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system ............................1-25
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH.................................1-28
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts .........................1-30
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH .....................1-32
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts..............1-36
Booster seats ................................1-41
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-44
Precautions on SRS..........................1-44
Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-62
Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-62
WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not leave children unattended in-
side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in se-
rious accidents.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-
ally. For additional information about ad-
justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or back-
ward to the desired position. Release the
bar to lock the seat in position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback for-
ward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-
back in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
LRS2708 LRS2709
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.
Seat lifter (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired po-
sition is achieved.
FOLDING REAR SEAT
1. Ensure the rear outboard seat belt
tongue is properly stowed in the rear
trim slot next to the door
䊊
A
before
moving the rear seatback
䊊
B
in order to
prevent the outboard seat belt from
getting caught behind the rear seat-
back.
LRS2710 LRS2954
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Pull the knob
䊊
C
and fold
䊊
D
the rear
seatback down.
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the fold-down position. Use of
these areas by passengers without
proper restraints could result in seri-
ous injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched po-
sition. If they are not completely se-
cured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
CENTER ARMREST (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down as shown.
LRS2701 LRS2733
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
ARMREST (if so equipped for
driver’s side only)
To use the armrest, pull it down as shown.
䊊
A
Stowed position
䊊
B
Resting position
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjustable head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach any-
thing to the head restraint/headrest
stalks or remove the head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly ad-
just the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.
The illustration shows the seating posi-
tions equipped with head
restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a head restraint.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
LRS2454 LRS2000
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the cen-
ter of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.
∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
LRS2300 LRS2299
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
with the notch (notches)
䊊
1
must be
installed in the hole with the lock knob
䊊
2
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.
LRS2302 LRS2303
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
WRS0134 LRS2351 LRS2305
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
LRS2306 SSS0136
SEAT BELTS
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.
SSS0134 SSS0016
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal inju-
ries in an accident.
∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-
curely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was mi-
nor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or im-
proper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the re-
straint manufacturer’s inspection in-
structions and replacement recom-
mendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
SSS0014
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front
seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-
ing light. The warning light, located on the
instrument panel, will show the status of
the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.
For additional information, refer to “Warn-
ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-
ommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.
LRS0786
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously in-
jured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-
tractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle
䊊
A
until you hear and feel the
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move, and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
LRS2708 LRS2674
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips
䊊
B
as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack
䊊
C
.
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-
tend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, re-
fer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During nor-
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the op-
eration of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental air bag warning light” in
this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
tain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
LRS2675
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle
䊊
1
. The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-
ward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service, or to learn more about seat
belt operation.
Center of the rear bench seat
The center seat belt has a connector
tongue
䊊
1
and a seat belt tongue
䊊
2
. Both
the connector tongue and the seat belt
tongue must be securely latched for
proper seat belt operation.
WRS0139 SSS0240
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Always fasten the connector tongue
and the seat belt in the order shown.
∙ Always make sure both the connector
tongue and the seat belt tongue are
secured when using the seat belt or
installing a child restraint. Do not use
the seat belt or child restraint with
only the seat belt tongue attached.
This could result in serious personal
injury in case of an accident or a sud-
den stop.
Stowing the center seat belt
When folding down the rear seat, the rear
center seat belt can be retracted into a
stowed position.
1. Hold the connector tongue
䊊
1
so that
the seat belt does not retract suddenly
when the tongue is released from the
connector buckle. Release the connec-
tor tongue by inserting a suitable tool
such as a key
䊊
2
into the connector
buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt and store the seat
belt tongue on the stowed position
䊊
3
.
WARNING
Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
SSS0241
LRS8100
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Attaching the center seat belt
Always be sure the center seat belt con-
nector tongue and connector buckle are
attached. Disconnect only when folding
down the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull the seat belt tongue and connector
tongue from the stowed position
䊊
1
.
2. Pull the seat belt and secure the con-
nector buckle until it clicks
䊊
2
.
The center seat belt connector tongue can
be attached only into the rear center seat
belt connector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, refer to “Fastening
the seat belts” in this section.
WARNING
∙
When attaching the rear center seat belt
connector, be certain that the seatbacks
are completely secured in the latched
position and the rear center seat belt
connector is completely secured.
∙ If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or
sudden stop.
∙ Make sure to wear the rear center seat
belt with the seat belt passing
through the path
䊊
A
.
LRS8101
LRS8102
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
adjust, pull out the adjustment button
䊊
1
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
desired position
䊊
2
, so the belt passes over
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-
justment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may re-
duce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The ex-
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-
stall child restraints. If the child re-
straint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution rec-
ommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
LRS0242
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be re-
placed.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-
lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-
lease the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly re-
strained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, includ-
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organiza-
tions. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child re-
straint systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraints
∙ Forward-facing child restraints
∙ Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-
facing child restraints are available for chil-
dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-
straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special pro-
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-
tal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
CHILD SAFETY
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the ve-
hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental re-
straint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-
sible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-
facturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommen-
dations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufac-
turer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forward-
facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle por-
tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-
ing?
∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-
justed head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?
If you answered no to any of these ques-
tions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always fol-
low all of the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forward-
facing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could se-
riously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
ARS1098 WRS0256
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
– Be sure to purchase a child re-
straint that will fit the child and ve-
hicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only loads im-
posed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances
are they to be used to attach adult
seat belts, or other items or equip-
ment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchor-
ages. The child restraint will not be
properly installed using the dam-
aged anchorage, and a child could
be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to these an-
chors. For additional information, refer to
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.
Several manufacturers offer child re-
straints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-
tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-
dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjust-
ments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use the LATCH an-
chors to install the child restraint (not
both at the same time).
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.
∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installa-
tion.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-
quires the top tether strap on forward-
facing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special an-
chor points that are used with LATCH sys-
tem compatible child restraints. This sys-
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-
hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the rear outboard
seating positions only. Do not attempt to
install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position us-
ing the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.
LATCH system lower anchor locations
WRS0756
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
– Inspect the lower anchors by in-
serting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured prop-
erly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower an-
chors.
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to two an-
chors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.
LATCH lower anchor location
WRS0700
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0661
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
If the cargo cover (if so equipped) con-
tacts the top tether strap when it is at-
tached to the top tether anchor, remove
the cargo cover from the vehicle or se-
cure it on the cargo floor below its at-
tachment location. If the cargo cover is
not removed, it may damage the top
tether strap during a collision. A child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the child restraint top tether
strap is damaged.
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the back of
the rear seats.
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LRS0662
LRS2245
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
WRS0801
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0802
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0674
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
∙ The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being prop-
erly secured. The restraint could tip
over or be loose and cause injury to a
child in a sudden stop or collision.
Also, it can change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this
section.
∙ When installing a child restraint sys-
tem in the rear center position, both
the center seat belt connector tongue
and buckle tongue must be secured.
For additional information, refer to
“Attaching the center seat belt” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear-facing – step 1
WRS0256
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully re-
tracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
Rear-facing – step 2
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0670
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Rear-facing – step 5
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 6
WRS0763
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section. Do not in-
stall child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating po-
sitions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for
Forward-facing webbing-mounted –
step 2
WRS0799
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0800
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
head restraint/headrest adjustment
information.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0697
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi-
tions only).
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Rear seats
LRS2452
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
∙ The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being prop-
erly secured. The restraint could tip
over or be loose and cause injury to a
child in a sudden stop or collision.
Also, it can change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this
section.
∙ When installing a child restraint sys-
tem in the rear center position, both
the center seat belt connector tongue
and buckle tongue must be secured.
For additional information, refer to
“Attaching the center seat belt” in this
section.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the
“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
WRS0699
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-
ger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for
head restraint/headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat in-
stallation only). For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.
Forward-facing – step 3
WRS0680
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Do not install child restraints that re-
quire the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat
belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0668
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 2 through 8.
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 8
WRS0698
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illu-
minated, refer to "Front passenger air
bag and status light" in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap as shown.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when installing
a top tether strap, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Forward-facing – step 10
WRS0475
Rear seats
LRS2452
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-
structions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-
lision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat
LRS2479
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard 213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-
erly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.
∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various ad-
justments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-
ing a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-
tions of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
LRS0453 LRS0464
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
WRS0699
Front passenger position
LRS0454
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-
ing the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-
structions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.
7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pas-
senger air bag status light
may or
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important infor-
mation concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-
tem
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact col-
lisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted.
WRS0475
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in the out-
board seating positions in certain side-
impact or rollover collisions. In a side im-
pact, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for
a short time.
These supplemental restraint systems are
designed to supplement the crash protec-
tion provided by the driver and front pas-
senger seat belts and are not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be cor-
rectly worn and the occupant seated a
suitable distance away from the steering
wheel, instrument panel and door finishers.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sit-
ting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unre-
strained,leaning forward, sitting side-
ways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sen-
sors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then in-
flates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sen-
sor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.
WRS0031
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
ARS1133 ARS1041
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill your child. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
ARS1045 ARS1046 SSS0101
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front seat
or near the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.
SSS0162 SSS0159
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions are shown in the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) and front
seat shoulder height adjuster (if so
equipped)
2. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
3. Crash zone sensor
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
5. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
6. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor – located in front passenger
cushion frame)
7. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
8. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
9. Side satellite sensor
WRS0032 LRS3034
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-
ing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described later in this section, get the
occupant classification system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your front passenger seat
occupant classification system is
working properly, position the occu-
pants in the rear seating positions.
∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the supple-
mental air bag warning light may
flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is de-
signed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual
still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not in-
flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-
cation of proper front air bag system op-
eration.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi-
cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-
eration is based on the severity of a colli-
sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classifi-
cation sensors are also monitored. Based
on information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend-
ing on the crash severity and whether the
front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad-
ditionally, the front passenger air bag may
be automatically turned OFF under some
conditions, depending on the weight de-
tected on the front passenger seat and
how the seat belt is used. If the front pas-
senger air bag is OFF, the front passenger
air bag status light will be illuminated (if the
seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illu-
minated, but the air bag will be off). For
additional information, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this sec-
tion. One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the sys-
tem.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a dis-
ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-
tact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the re-
lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-
tion and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce seri-
ous injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-
straint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver
and front passenger seated upright as far
as practical away from the steering wheel
or instrument panel. The front air bags in-
flate quickly in order to help protect the
front occupants. Because of this, the force
of the front air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, the front air bag module
during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protec-
tion. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight ap-
plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-
tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
bag status light
which is located on
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:
The
light is OFF and the front pas-
senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate
in a crash.
∙ Front passenger seat occupied by a
small adult, child or child restraint as
outlined in this section: The
light
illuminates to indicate that the front
passenger air bag is OFF and will not
inflate in a crash.
∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the
passenger meets the conditions as
outlined in this section: The
light is
OFF to indicate that the front passen-
ger air bag is operational.
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as de-
scribed above depending on their weight.
For additional information, refer to “Normal
operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as de-
scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-
lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-
ing the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
WRS0475
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-
dance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-
pant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supple-
mental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-
propriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classifica-
tion sensor is designed to operate as de-
scribed above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to prop-
erly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflat-
ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight de-
tected by the occupant classification sen-
sor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and re-
strained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front pas-
senger air bag is automatically turned OFF
with the seat occupied. The light will not
illuminate when the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illu-
minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status light
may or may not be illuminated, depending
on the size of the child and the type of child
restraint being used. If the air bag status light
is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag
might inflate in a crash), it could be that the
child restraint or seat belt is not being used
properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used prop-
erly and the occupant is positioned properly.
If the air bag status light is still not illumi-
nated, reposition the occupant or child re-
straint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, the
system may be sensing an unoccupied
seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
NISSAN dealer can check that the system is
OFF by using a special tool. However, until
you have confirmed with a dealer that your
air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is nor-
mal system operation and does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-
ger air bag system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
, located in the me-
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passen-
ger based on weight, please follow the pre-
cautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-
ing against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
5.
Ensure proper classification by checking
the front passenger air bag status light.
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-
sor system locks the classification during
driving so it is important that you confirm
that the front passenger is properly clas-
sified prior to driving. Also, the occupant
classification sensor system may recalcu-
late the weight of the occupant when the
vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop
sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occu-
pants should continue to remain seated
as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger
seat:
This may be due to the following condi-
tions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
2. If the light is ON with an adult occupy-
ing the front passenger seat:
∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
3. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following con-
ditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and cen-
tered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
∙ The child restraint is not properly in-
stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-
straints” section of this manual.
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be re-
positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steer-
ing wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous pro-
jectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end struc-
ture. This could affect proper opera-
tion of the front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in-
jury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instru-
ment panel assembly by placing ma-
terial over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by in-
stalling additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-
senger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in seri-
ous personal injury.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing ma-
terial on the seat cushion or by install-
ing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front pas-
senger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occu-
pant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equip-
ment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain side-
impact and rollover supplemental
air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-
tain air bags are located in the side roof
rails. All of the information, cautions, and
warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The side air bags and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of colli-
LRS0259
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
sion are similar to those of a higher severity
side impact. They are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
They may not inflate in certain side colli-
sions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-
ments (for example, during severe off-
roading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest of the front occupants. Curtain
air bags help to cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in the front and rear
outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-
ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air
bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and passenger seated up-
right as far as practical away from the side
air bag. Rear seat passengers should be
seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the occupants. Be-
cause of this, the force of the side air bags
and curtain air bags inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-
ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for
a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door fin-
isher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system com-
ponents will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
curtain air bag systems.
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in-
jury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing addi-
tional trim material, such as seat cov-
ers, around the side air bag.
∙ Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
ing harnesses* should not be modi-
fied or disconnected. Unauthorized
electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the
side air bag or curtain air bag
systems.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-
placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the preten-
sioner system checked and, if neces-
sary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental acti-
vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-
ing with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work around and on
the pretensioner system. It is also rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the preten-
sioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-
sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-
posal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-
comes involved in certain types of colli-
sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
pants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased with the
seat belt retractor. These seat belts are
used the same way as conventional seat
belts.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release web-
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
light
is used to indicate malfunctions
in the pretensioner(s) system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Supplemental
air bag warning light” in this section. If the
operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunc-
tion, have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the preten-
sioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (lo-
cated on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-
tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
WRS0897 LRS0100
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner
systems may not operate properly. They
must be checked and repaired. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-
minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-
mental air bag warning light remains illu-
minated after inflation has occurred.These
systems should be repaired and/or re-
placed as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-
lated parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The
ignition switch should always be placed in
the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioner(s) must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner(s) should be re-
placed. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
However, the air bag module and pre-
tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked to verify it is still functioning
correctly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no
air bags deploy as a result of the im-
pact. Failure to verify proper OCS
function may result in an improper air
bag deployment resulting in injury or
death.
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel ................................2-2
Meters and gauges..............................2-3
Speedometer and odometer .................2-5
Tachometer ..................................2-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-9
Fuel gauge ..................................2-10
Trip computer ................................2-11
Service interval reminder
(if so equipped) ..............................2-12
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders ......................................2-14
Checking lights ..............................2-15
Warning lights ...............................2-15
Indicator lights ..............................2-20
Audible reminders...........................2-23
Security systems ...............................2-24
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
(if so equipped) ..............................2-24
Wiper and washer switch .......................2-25
Switch operation ............................2-25
Rear switch operation .......................2-26
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch................2-27
Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-28
Headlight control switch.....................2-28
Daytime running light (DRL) system
(Canada only)................................2-29
Instrument brightness control...............2-29
Turn signal switch ...........................2-30
Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-31
Horn ...........................................2-31
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-32
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-33
Power outlets ..................................2-33
Storage ........................................2-34
Front-door pockets..........................2-34
Seatback pocket ............................2-35
Storagetray.................................2-35
Glovebox....................................2-36
Upper glove box .............................2-36
Cup holders
.................................2-36
Divide-n-hide®
adjustable floor
(if so equipped) ..............................2-38
Cargo cover (if so equipped) .................2-39
Windows .......................................2-40
Power windows (if so equipped) .............2-40
Manual windows (if so equipped) ............2-42
Interior lights ...................................2-42
Map light ....................................2-43
Luggage compartment light ...................2-44
1. Headlight/fog light
(if so equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-28)
2. Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
Horn (P. 2-31)
3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-25)
5. Vents (P. 4-28)
6. Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-27)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
8. Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-44)
9. Climate control (P. 4-28)
10. Audio system (P. 4-36)
11. Upper glove box (P. 2-34)
12. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
13. Lower glove box (P. 2-34)
14. Upper glove box release handle
(P. 2-34)
15. Power outlet (P. 2-33)
16. Cup holders (P. 2-34)
LIC3759
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
17. USB connection port
(if so equipped) (P. 4-61)
AUX IN jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-61)
18. Shift lever (P. 5-15)
19. Cup holders (P. 2-34)
20. Push-button ignition switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-10)
21. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-8)
22. Cruise control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-22)
23. Tilt steering (P. 3-31)
24. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-81, 4-96, 4-108)
Audio control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 4-36)
Trip computer control switches
(if so equipped) (P. 2-11)
25. Hood release lever (P. 3-26)
26. Fuel-filler door release lever
(P. 3-28)
27. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-33)
28. Outside mirror control switch
(P. 3-33)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
1. Tachometer
2. Temperature gauge
3. Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer
4. Fuel gauge
5. Speedometer
6. Trip odometer reset switch
Trip computer mode
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2146
METERS AND GAUGES
Instruments and controls 2-3
7. Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion (CVT) position indicator (CVT
models only)
8. Instrument brightness control
CAUTION
∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft
cloth, dampened with water. Never
use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,
thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or cause discolor-
ation to the lens.
∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water
on the meter lens. Spraying liquid
may cause the system to malfunction.
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Trip computer
Outside Air Temperature (if so
equipped)
4. Trip odometer reset switch
Instrument brightness control
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3660
2-4 Instruments and controls
5. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator (CVT mod-
els only)
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
6. Fuel gauge
CAUTION
∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft
cloth, dampened with water. Never
use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,
thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or cause discolor-
ation to the lens.
∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water
on the meter lens. Spraying liquid
may cause the system to malfunction.
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-
eter and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter clus-
ter. The odometer is located within the trip
computer.
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2136
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2763
Instruments and controls 2-5
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-
played when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
The odometer
䊊
1
records the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer
䊊
2
records the dis-
tance of individual trips.
Changing the display
Press the change button
䊊
3
to change the
display as follows:
Type A: Odometer (ODO) → Trip
→
Trip
→ Instant fuel consumption →
Average fuel consumption → DTE (cruising
range) → Outside Air Temperature (if so
equipped) → Odometer (ODO)
Type B: Trip
→ Trip → Trip
Resetting the trip odometer
Press the change/reset button
䊊
3
for more
than 1 second to reset the currently dis-
played trip odometer to zero.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2139
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2758
2-6 Instruments and controls
Loose fuel cap warning message
Push the reset button
䊊
A
for more than
1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after the fuel cap has
been tightened. For additional information,
refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Check tire pressure warning
message (if so equipped)
The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is displayed when the low tire
pressure warning light is illuminated and
low tire pressure is detected. Check and
adjust the tire pressure to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
Type A: The CHECK TIRE PRES warning
message can be turned off using the reset
button
䊊
A
on the meter, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will not be turned off.
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2025
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2836
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2128
Instruments and controls 2-7
Type B: The CHECK TIRE PRES warning
message is displayed when the low
tire pressure warning light is illumi-
nated and low tire pressure is detected.
Check and adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the tire and Loading Information label.
The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure.
Type A Only: The CHECK TIRE PRES warn-
ing message is displayed each time the
ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion as long as the low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in this section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Wheels
and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not rev the engine into the red zone
䊊
1
.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3669
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2151
2-8 Instruments and controls
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a read-
ing.
Type A: The gauge indicates the engine
coolant temperature. The engine coolant
temperature will vary with the outside air
temperature and driving conditions.
Type B: Engine coolant temperature moni-
toring is performed by the high tempera-
ture warning light. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “High temperature warning
light (red)” in this section.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates a coolant tem-
perature near the hot (H) end of the nor-
mal range, reduce vehicle speed to de-
crease the temperature. If the gauge is
over the normal range, stop the vehicle
as soon as safely possible. If the engine
is overheated, continued operation of
the vehicle may seriously damage the
engine. For additional information, re-
fer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2761
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2501
Instruments and controls 2-9
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
The gauge may move slightly during brak-
ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
The low fuel warning light will turn on when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-
isters 0 (Empty).
The
indicates that the fuel-filler
door is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
check engine light may come on. Re-
fuel as soon as possible. After a few
driving trips, the
light should
turn off. If the light remains on after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle in-
spected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3257
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2762
2-10 Instruments and controls
TRIP COMPUTER
Type A: When the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position, modes of the trip com-
puter can be selected by pushing the trip
computer change button
䊊
A
on the instru-
ment panel located near the speedometer.
The following modes can be selected in the
display
䊊
B
:
∙ Odometer
∙ Trip A
∙ Trip B
∙ Instant fuel consumption
∙ Average fuel consumption
∙ Distance to empty
∙ Outside air temperature (if so equipped)
Type B: When the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position, modes of the trip com-
puter can be selected by pushing the
menu button
on the steering wheel.
The following modes can be selected in the
display
䊊
B
:
∙ Instant fuel consumption
∙ Average fuel consumption
∙ Distance to empty
∙ Average speed
∙ Travel time
∙ Outside air temperature (if so equipped)
Instant fuel consumption
The instant fuel consumption mode shows
the instant fuel economy. The display up-
dates instantly when driving.
Average fuel consumption (mpg
or l (liter)/100km)
The average fuel consumption mode
shows the average fuel consumption since
the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing
the trip or change button for more than
approximately 1 second. The display is up-
dated every 30 seconds. At about the first
1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).
Distance to empty
The distance to empty mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can
be driven before refueling. The range is
constantly being calculated, based on the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the
actual fuel consumption.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2138
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2764
Instruments and controls 2-11
The distance to empty includes a low
range warning feature: when the fuel level
is low, the distance to empty is automati-
cally selected and the digits blink in order
to draw the driver’s attention. Press the trip
computer change/reset button if you wish
to return to the mode that was selected
before the warning occurred.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the
distance to empty will display (----).
Average speed
The average speed mode shows the aver-
age vehicle speed since the last reset. Re-
setting is done by pushing the menu but-
ton on the steering wheel for longer than
1 second.
Travel time
The travel time mode (elapsed time) shows
the time since the last reset. The displayed
time can be reset by pushing the menu
button on the steering wheel for longer
than 1 second.
Trip computer reset
Type A (if so equipped):Pushing the
change button for more than 3 seconds
will reset all modes except Trip A and Dis-
tance To Empty (DTE).
Type B (if so equipped):Pushing the menu
button
on the steering wheel for
more than 3 seconds will reset average fuel
economy, average speed and travel time.
Outside air temperature (ICY-°F or
°C) (if so equipped)
The outside air temperature is displayed in
°F or °C.
The outside air temperature mode in-
cludes a low temperature warning feature:
below 37°F (3°C), the outside air tempera-
ture mode is automatically selected and
ICY will illuminate in order to draw the driv-
er’s attention. Press the trip or change but-
ton to toggle to the next mode, if desired.
The ICY indicator will remain illuminated as
long as the temperature remains below
39°F (4°C).
The ambient temperature sensor is lo-
cated in front of the radiator. The sensor
may be affected by road or engine heat,
wind directions and other driving condi-
tions. The display may differ from the ac-
tual ambient temperature or the tempera-
ture displayed on various signs or
billboards.
SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER (if
so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, a wrench symbol and the dis-
tance to oil change information will illumi-
nate on the display for approximately
5 seconds. The wrench symbol and dis-
tance to oil change switch to oil display
status. The oil display status then switches
to the odometer and twin trip odometer
information mode that was displayed be-
fore the ignition switch was placed in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position.
The oil level display status provides specific
information regarding your approximate
engine oil level.
If the oil level is sufficient, “Oil Good” is dis-
played for approximately 10 seconds. If the
oil level is low, “Oil Lo” blinks for approxi-
mately 30 seconds in order to draw your
attention to necessary action.
Quickly push and release the trip odometer
reset switch on the instrument panel lo-
cated near the speedometer during the
“Oil Good” or “Oil Lo” mode to display an
approximate oil level indication.
2-12 Instruments and controls
In case of low engine oil level, refer to “En-
gine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself” section for
the proper engine oil refilling procedure.
Oil change schedule set up (if so
equipped)
It is possible to adjust the interval distance
to oil change by pushing the trip odometer
reset switch on the instrument panel lo-
cated near the speedometer for 3 seconds
while the wrench symbol and distance to
oil change are displayed. The symbol and
distance display will start flashing and the
display shows the current interval. Push
the switch to increase the interval distance.
Each step increases the interval distance
by 500 mi (1,000 km). The interval distance
can be set up to 18,000 mi (30,000 km) after
which the display returns to zero.
If no further action is made, the display
returns to oil display status indication and
the new interval is set.
If the interval distance is set to 0, the display
will skip the distance to oil change informa-
tion and wrench symbol display mode and
will directly display the oil display status (“Oil
Good” or “Oil Lo”). In order to return to the
distance to oil change information and
wrench symbol display mode, push the trip
computer change button on the instru-
ment panel located near the speedometer
for approximately 3 seconds after the igni-
tion switch has been turned to the ON po-
sition, and adjust the distance to oil change
schedule as previously described.
For additional information, refer to “Stan-
dard maintenance” in the “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual.
CAUTION
∙ The oil level should be checked regu-
larly. Operating with insufficient
amount of oil level can damage the
engine and such damage is not cov-
ered by the warranty.
∙ NISSAN recommends checking the oil
level every 3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Instruments and controls 2-13
or Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
P position selecting warning light
(if so equipped)
High beam indicator light (blue)
or Brake warning light
Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so
equipped)
Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light (if so equipped)
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)
High temperature warning light (red)
(if so equipped)
Cruise main switch indicator light
(if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Low fuel warning light Cruise set switch indicator light
(if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Low tire pressure warning light
(if so equipped)
Engine start operation indicator light
(if so equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light (if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light
(if so equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light
(if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-14 Instruments and controls
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
or , , , ,
The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on briefly and then go off:
or , (red), , ,
, , , ,
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-
function. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING LIGHTS
This vehicle has various warning lights that
may illuminate to indicate a potential prob-
lem. For additional information, refer to the
specific light in this section.
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without anti-
lock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
or Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the park-
ing brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running with the parking brake not ap-
plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-15
WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be work-
ing properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because driving it could be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminates, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-
tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging sys-
tem is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the drive belt. If the
belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light
remains on, have your vehicle serviced im-
mediately. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the drive belt
is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
the light flickers or comes on during normal
driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop
the engine immediately
and call a NISSAN
dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use
the dipstick to check the oil level. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as
it is safe to do so.
High temperature warning
light (red) (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the high temperature warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This in-
dicates that the high temperature sensor in
the engine coolant system is operational.
2-16 Instruments and controls
When driving, the high temperature warn-
ing light may turn off. This indicates that the
engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range.
CAUTION
If the high temperature warning light
illuminates while the engine is running,
it may indicate the engine temperature
is extremely high. Stop the vehicle
safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle
is overheated, continuing vehicle op-
eration may seriously damage the en-
gine. For additional information, refer
to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty), show-
ing no more fuel bars.
Low tire pressure warning
light (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-
tors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illumi-
nate.
A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is also displayed in the odom-
eter.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
flated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-
played each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illumi-
nated.
For additional information, refer to "Check
tire pressure warning message" in this sec-
tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
and in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-17
The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not
appear if the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
show on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjust-
ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly in-
flated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light will re-
main on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Low windshield-washer
fluid warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
additional information, refer to “Windshield-
washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
warning light (if so
equipped)
The Intelligent Key warning light illumi-
nates green when the ignition switch can
be turned. The Intelligent Key warning light
illuminates red when the ignition switch
cannot be turned.
The Intelligent Key warning light blinks red if
the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the
vehicle while the ignition switch is placed in
the ACC or ON position.
∙ If the Intelligent Key warning light blinks,
make sure of the location of the Intelli-
gent Key as soon as possible. The Intel-
ligent Key should be carried by the
driver while operating the vehicle.
∙ The Intelligent Key warning light turns
off about 10 seconds after the Intelli-
gent Key is brought inside the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key warning light blinks
green indicating that the Intelligent Key
battery is almost discharged.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
P position selecting
warning light (if so
equipped)
The light blinks red and the warning buzzer
sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with
the Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but
the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.
When the warning light blinks, place the
ignition switch in the ON position, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position, then
place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
Power steering warning
light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may in-
dicate the power steering is not functioning
properly and may need servicing. Have the
power steering checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-19
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
your seat belts. The light illuminates when-
ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position and remains illuminated
until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
same time, the chime sounds for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illumi-
nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-
tem does not activate the warning light for
the front passenger.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supple-
mental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-
tion properly. For additional information, re-
fer to “Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
This vehicle has various indicator lights
that may illuminate to indicate a system
status. For additional information, refer to
the specific light in this section.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light (if
so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the indicator light shows the shift
lever position. For additional information,
refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Cruise main switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The light goes out
when the main switch is pushed again.
When the cruise main switch indicator light
comes on, the cruise control system is op-
erational.
Cruise set switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
The light comes on while the vehicle speed
is controlled by the cruise control system. If
the light blinks while the engine is running,
it may indicate the cruise control system is
not functioning properly. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine start operation
indicator light (if so
equipped)
For vehicles equipped with push button ig-
nition this indicator illuminates when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or
ON position with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the push-button ignition
switch with the brake pedal depressed.
Front fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illumi-
nates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, refer to “Fog light
switch” in this section.
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the head-
light high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control mal-
function.
The
may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gal
(11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off if no other potential emis-
sion control system malfunction exists.
Instruments and controls 2-21
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been de-
tected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message is
displayed in the odometer, and the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The
light should turn off
after a few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. You do not need
to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system dam-
age:
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h);
– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-
tion;
– avoid steep uphill grades;
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.
Overdrive OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)
The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi-
nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se-
lected.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
Security indicator light (if
so equipped)
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This
light blinks whenever the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light
blinks when the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position with the key removed
from the ignition switch.
The blinking security indicator light indi-
cates that the security systems equipped
on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlight
position is selected. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operat-
ing, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing
its traction limits. The road surface may be
slippery.
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
NOTE:
In case of a turn signal light bulb mal-
function, the turn signal will flash at a
higher frequency when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.
For additional information, refer to “Lights”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-
cates the VDC system is not operating.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will operate
normally. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
The VDC light also comes on when you
place the ignition switch in the ON position.
The light will turn off after about 2 seconds
if the system is operational. If the light stays
on or comes on along with the
indi-
cator light while you are driving, have the
VDC system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-
tem working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-
pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is
opened while the key is left in the ignition
switch. Remove the key and take it with you
when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.
Instruments and controls 2-23
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door
buzzer (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if
any one of the following improper opera-
tions is found.
∙ The ignition switch is not returned to
the LOCK position when locking the
doors.
∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the ve-
hicle when locking the doors.
∙ The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
∙ Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For
additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-
telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section.
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set
and the vehicle is driven. The chime will
stop if the parking brake is released or the
vehicle speed returns to zero.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the
ON position for approximately 5 sec-
onds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
2-24 Instruments and controls
Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This
light blinks whenever the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light
blinks when the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position with the key removed
from the ignition switch.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as
soon as possible. Please bring all regis-
tered keys that you have. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
LIC0474
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3028
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-25
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the res-
ervoir is empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufac-
turer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
䊊
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-
eration can be adjusted (if so
equipped) by turning the knob toward
䊊
A
(Slower) or
䊊
B
(Faster).
䊊
2
Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-
eration
䊊
3
High (HI) — continuous high speed op-
eration
Push the lever up
䊊
4
to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you
䊊
5
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
REAR SWITCH OPERATION
The rear window wiper and washer oper-
ate when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF
position to operate the wiper.
䊊
1
Intermittent (INT) – intermittent opera-
tion (not adjustable)
䊊
2
ON – continuous low speed operation
Push the switch forward
䊊
3
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3239
LIC3101
2-26 Instruments and controls
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the window and
obscure your vision. Warm the rear win-
dow with the defroster before you wash
the rear window.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
windshield-washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufac-
turer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
To defrost the rear window glass and out-
side mirrors (if so equipped), start the en-
gine and push the rear window defroster
switch on. The rear window defroster indi-
cator light on the switch comes on. Push
the switch again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
LIC2116
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-27
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.
䊊
2
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
Headlight beam select
䊊
1
To select the high beam function, en-
gage the headlights, then push the le-
ver forward. The high beam lights
come on and the
indicator light
illuminates (blue). For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Headlight control
switch” in this section.
䊊
2
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.
䊊
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off,
the headlights need not be on for this
function.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2127
Type B (if so equipped)
WIC1509
LIC2128
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
2-28 Instruments and controls
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is in
the
or position, the headlights
will turn off after a period of time.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL)
SYSTEM (Canada only)
The daytime running lights automatically
illuminate when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime
running lights operate with the headlight
switch in the OFF position or in the
position. Turn the headlight switch to
the
position for full illumination when
driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the daytime running
lights do not illuminate. The daytime run-
ning lights illuminate when the parking
brake is released. The daytime running
lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position or the head-
light switch is turned to the
position.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system
is active, tail lights on your vehicle are
not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
your headlights. Failure to do so could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control oper-
ates when the vehicle is in the ON position.
Type A
Press the control
䊊
A
to adjust the bright-
ness of instrument panel lights when driv-
ing at night.
Type B
Turn the knob
䊊
A
left continuously for illumi-
nation to decrease and turn the knob right
continuously for illumination to increase.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2137
Instruments and controls 2-29
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels au-
tomatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2769
WIC1512
2-30 Instruments and controls
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to oper-
ate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are se-
lected.
To sound the horn, push near the horn
icon(s) on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
WIC1513
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2419
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC1389
HORN
Instruments and controls 2-31
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts in contact with the seat. Use
of the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-
tended periods or when no one is us-
ing the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion or seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in dam-
age to the heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select the switch that corresponds to
the seat you wish to heat, the switches
are located on the center console.
Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermo-
stat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will re-
main on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
LIC3037
HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
2-32 Instruments and controls
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator will come
on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-
ing and driving” section of this manual.
The power outlets are for powering electri-
cal accessories such as cellular tele-
phones. The outlets are rated at 12 volt,
120W (10A) maximum.
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
LIC3344
Instrument panel
LIC3609
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
POWER OUTLETS
Instruments and controls 2-33
∙ Only certain power outlets are de-
signed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power out-
let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information
∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear win-
dow defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
Console (if so equipped)
LIC3610
LIC2157
STORAGE
2-34 Instruments and controls
SEATBACK POCKET
The seatback pocket is located on the
back of the front passenger seat. The
pocket can be used to store maps.
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest, or in the seatback
pocket.
STORAGE TRAY
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
LIC2782 LIC2742
Instruments and controls 2-35
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
Use pocket on glove box lid
䊊
A
to store and
hide small objects.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
UPPER GLOVE BOX
Open the upper glove box by pulling the
handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is
hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
LIC3613 LIC2532
Front
LIC3611
2-36 Instruments and controls
Lower the rear center armrest to access
the cup holders.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-
uid containers.
Rear – console
LIC3612
Rear – armrest (if so equipped)
LIC2656
Bottle holder
LIC2158
Instruments and controls 2-37
DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE
FLOOR (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not put objects heavier than 110 lbs.
(50 kg) on the load floor.
To lower:
1. Lift and open the panel.
2. Move the load floor along the upper
trim panel channels toward the rear of
vehicle until it reaches the end of the
slot.
3. Move the load floor along the lower
trim panel channels toward the front of
the vehicle until the latches lock it into
place.
4. Lift and close the panel.
To raise:
1. Lift and open the panel
2. Move the load floor along the lower
trim panel channels toward the rear of
the vehicle until it reaches the end of
the slot.
3. Move the load floor along the upper
trim panel channels toward the front of
the vehicle until the latches lock it into
place.
4. Lift and close the panel.
LIC2527 LIC2528
2-38 Instruments and controls
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Never put anything on the cargo
cover, no matter how small. Any ob-
ject on it could cause an injury in an
accident or sudden stop.
∙ Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs.
(20 kg) on the cargo cover for long
periods of time.
∙ Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child re-
straint top tether strap is damaged.
∙ Properly secure cargo and do not al-
low it to contact the top tether strap
when it is attached to the top tether
anchor. Cargo that is not properly se-
cured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage the top
tether strap during a collision. If the
cargo cover contacts the top tether
strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor, remove the cargo cover
from the vehicle or secure it on the
cargo floor below its attachment lo-
cation. If the cargo cover is not re-
moved, it may damage the top tether
strap during a collision. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the child restraint top
tether strap is damaged.
The cargo cover keeps the luggage com-
partment contents hidden from the out-
side.
LIC2125
Instruments and controls 2-39
To remove the cargo cover:
∙ Remove the straps from the rear hatch.
∙ Remove the cargo cover holders
䊊
1
from the rear pillar.
∙ Lower the cargo cover down against
the seatback, rotate and remove from
the cargo area.
POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver-
tent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the as-
sistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-
perature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the ON position, or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger’s side window
switch
4. Right rear passenger’s window
switch
5. Left rear passenger’s window
switch
6. Driver’s side automatic switch
WIC1100
WINDOWS
2-40 Instruments and controls
Driver’s side power window
switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close the front
and rear passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and
hold it down. To close a window, pull the
switch and hold it up. To stop the opening
or closing function at any time, simply re-
lease the switch.
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s win-
dow. To open the window, push the switch
and hold it down
䊊
1
. To close the window,
pull the switch up
䊊
2
.
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
it down
䊊
1
. To close the window, pull the
switch up
䊊
2
.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.
WIC0260 WIC0261
Instruments and controls 2-41
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with au-
tomatic operation, push the window
switch down to the second detent and re-
lease it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the win-
dow is opening.
MANUAL WINDOWS (if so
equipped)
The side windows can be opened or closed
by turning the hand crank on each door.
The interior light has a three-position
switch and operates regardless of ignition
switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position
䊊
1
,
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
door position. The lights will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
LIC3770 LIC3352 SIC2063A
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2-42 Instruments and controls
When the switch is in the DOOR position
䊊
2
,
the interior lights will stay on for a period of
time when:
∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a
key or the power door lock switch while
all doors are closed and the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is
activated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key
fob, a key, or the power door lock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
When the switch is in the OFF position
䊊
3
,
the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-
less of door position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to pre-
vent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
MAP LIGHT
The map light has a three-position switch
and operates regardless of ignition switch
position.
When the switch is in the ON position
䊊
3
,
the map light illuminates, regardless of
door position. The light will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
LIC2126
Instruments and controls 2-43
When the switch is in the DOOR position
䊊
2
,
the map light will stay on for a period of
time when:
∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if
so equipped), a key or the power door
lock switch while all doors are closed
and the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the timer is acti-
vated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob
(if so equipped), a key, or the power door
lock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
When the switch is in the OFF position
䊊
1
,
the map light does not illuminate, regard-
less of door position.
The light will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to pre-
vent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
The light illuminates when the rear hatch is
opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the
light will turn off.
The light also illuminates with other interior
lights when the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position. For additional information,
refer to “Interior lights” in this section.
The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to pre-
vent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
2-44 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) .......3-3
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys (if so equipped) ..........................3-5
Doors ...........................................3-5
Locking with key..............................3-6
Locking with inside lock knob.................3-7
Locking with power door lock switch
(if so equipped) ...............................3-7
Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ........3-7
Child safety rear door lock ....................3-8
Remote keyless entry system (models
without NISSAN Intelligent Key®)
(if so equipped) ..................................3-8
How to use remote keyless entry
system .......................................3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) .........3-12
Operating range.............................3-14
Door locks/unlocks precaution ..............3-14
NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation............3-15
How to use the remote keyless entry
function .....................................3-18
Warning lights and audible reminders .......3-21
Warning signals .............................3-22
Troubleshooting guide (Continuously
Variable Transmission only)..................3-24
Troubleshooting guide
(manual transmission only)..................3-25
Hood ...........................................3-26
Rear hatch .....................................3-27
Opening the rear hatch......................3-27
Rear hatch release ..........................3-28
Fuel-filler door ..................................3-28
Opener operation ...........................3-28
Fuel-filler cap ................................3-29
Steering wheel ................................. 3-31
Tilt operation ................................3-31
Sun visors ......................................3-31
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) ...............3-32
Mirrors .........................................3-32
Rearview mirror .............................3-32
Outside mirrors .............................3-33
1. Master key
2. Transponder chip (if so equipped)
3. Key number plate
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
make a duplicate. If you still have a key, it
can be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
1. Integrated door lock key fob
2. Key number plate
CAUTION
Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2130
Type B—Remote keyless entry key fob
(if so equipped)
LPD2045
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
1. Two Intelligent Keys
2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
Keys)
3. Key number plate
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-
ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System components.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The
new keys must be registered prior to use
with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Since the registra-
tion process requires erasing all memory in
the Intelligent Key components when reg-
istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli-
gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
LPD0350
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelli-
gent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-
gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-
mation regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-
cal key, which can be used in case of a
discharged battery.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
The mechanical key can be used for opera-
tion in the same way as an ordinary key.
SPA1951
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key in-
stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.
For additional information, refer to “Doors”
in this section and “Storage” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)
You can only drive your vehicle using the
keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components
in your vehicle.
A mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-
isting key can be duplicated without know-
ing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer
for registration. This is because the regis-
tration process will erase the memory of all
key codes previously registered into the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After
the registration process, these compo-
nents will only recognize keys coded into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
during registration. Any key that is not
given to the dealer at the time of registra-
tion will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical tran-
sponder, to come into contact with wa-
ter or salt water. This could affect sys-
tem function.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.
WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintention-
ally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.
∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
DOORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inad-
vertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets un-
attended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.
LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.
Manual (if so equipped)
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
of the vehicle
䊊
1
. To unlock, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle
䊊
2
.
Selective open (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front
䊊
1
of the
vehicle locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear
䊊
2
of the vehicle unlocks that door. From
that position, returning the key to neutral
䊊
3
(where the key can only be removed and
inserted) and turning it toward the rear
again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
䊊
4
.
Driver’s side
LPD2160
LPD2161
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position
䊊
1
,
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-
ger’s side) to the lock position
䊊
1
. When
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-
senger’s side) to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved
to the lock position and any door is open, all
doors will lock and unlock automatically.
With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle
and any door open, all doors will unlock
automatically and a chime will sound after
the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelli-
gent Key from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so
equipped)
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when
the transmission is placed in the P
(Park) position.
∙ Manual transmission (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when
the ignition is placed in the off posi-
tion.
Inside lock
SPA2760
WPD0381
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
∙ Vehicles not equipped with Intelligent
Key (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when
the transmission is placed in the P
(Park) position (if so equipped), the
ignition is turned to the OFF position
or when the key is removed from the
ignition.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, es-
pecially when small children are in the ve-
hicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position
䊊
2
,
the door can be opened from the outside
or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position
䊊
1
,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ The remote keyless entry key fob
transmits radio waves when the but-
tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-
dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-
tion and communication systems. Do
not operate the remote keyless entry
key fob while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated un-
intentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn
the interior lights on, and activate the panic
alarm by using the key fob from outside the
vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the ve-
hicle before locking the doors.
The key fob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
The effective distance depends on the
conditions around the vehicle.
LPD2166
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(models without NISSAN Intelligent
Key®) (if so equipped)
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
As many as five key fobs can be used with
one vehicle. For information concerning
the purchase and use of additional key
fobs, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
∙ The battery is discharged.
∙ The distance between the vehicle and
the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm will not activate when
the key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the key fob:
∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con-
tains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
∙ Do not drop the key fob.
∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.
∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If
the key fob gets wet, immediately
wipe until it is completely dry.
∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-
tended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that
key fob. This will prevent the key fob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Close all doors and the rear hatch.
4. Press the
button on the key fob.
All the doors lock. The hazard warning
lights flash twice and the horn beeps
once to indicate all doors are locked.
LPD2039
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
∙ When the button is pressed
with all doors locked, the hazard
warning lights flash twice and the
horn beeps once as a reminder that
the doors are already locked.
∙ If a door is open and you press
the
button, the doors will lock
but the horn will not beep and the
hazard lights will not flash.
The horn may or may not beep. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Silencing the
horn beep feature” in this section.
Unlocking doors
Press the button on the key fob once.
∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.
∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
all doors are completely closed with the
ignition switch in any position except
the ON position.
∙ The interior light turns on and the light
timer activates for a period of time
when the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position with the ignition switch
in any position except the ON position.
Press the
button on the key fob again
within 5 seconds.
∙ All doors and the rear hatch unlock.
∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
all doors are completely closed.
The interior lights can be turned off without
waiting by inserting the key into the ignition
switch and placing the ignition switch in
the ON or START position, locking the doors
with the key fob or pushing the interior light
switch to the OFF position.
Auto relock
When the button on the key fob is
pressed, all doors will lock automatically
within 1 minute unless one of the following
operations is performed:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch
and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
LPD2040
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
the
button on the key fob for longer
than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time.
∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.
Using the interior light
Press the button on the key fob once
to turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior
lights” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be
deactivated using the key fob.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm that the horn beep fea-
ture has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
LPD2041 LPD2044
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reac-
tivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-
gered.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door
locks using the remote control function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or
conditions may affect the Intelligent Key
operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehicle.
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicat-
ing with the vehicle as it receives radio
waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak
radio waves. Environmental conditions
may interfere with the operation of the In-
telligent Key under the following operating
conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted,
such as a TV tower, power station and
broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equip-
ment, such as a cellular telephone,
transceiver, or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-
ing meter.
In such cases, correct the operating condi-
tions before using the Intelligent Key func-
tion or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies de-
pending on the operating conditions, the
battery’s life is approximately two years. If
the battery is discharged, replace it with a
new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the
Intelligent Key system warning light (
)
will blink green for about 30 seconds after
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-
ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and per-
sonal computer, the battery life may be-
come shorter.
When the battery is discharged, firmly ap-
ply the foot brake and touch the ignition
switch with the Intelligent Key. Then push
the ignition switch while depressing the
brake pedal within 10 seconds after the
chime sound. For additional information,
refer to “Push-button ignition switch” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelli-
gent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
∙ If the outside temperature is below
14°F (-10°C) the battery of the Intelli-
gent Key may not function properly.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-
gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-
mation regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
switch
䊊
1
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower,
and the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in
(80 cm) from each request switch
䊊
1
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-
ating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelli-
gent Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close dis-
tance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle re-
quest switch, verify the doors are se-
curely locked by testing them.
LPD2162 LPD2554
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-
ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch. The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch or rear
hatch request switch within the range of
operation.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors and the rear hatch.
3. Push any door handle request switch
䊊
1
or the rear hatch request switch
䊊
2
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
4. All doors and the rear hatch will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside buzzer sounds once.
LPD2163 LPD2164
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
NOTE:
∙ Doors lock with the door handle re-
quest switch or rear hatch request
switch while the ignition switch is
pushed in.
∙ Doors lock with the door handle re-
quest switch or the rear hatch re-
quest switch while the ignition switch
is not in the LOCK position.
∙ Doors do not lock with the door
handle request switch or the rear
hatch request switch with the Intelli-
gent Key inside the vehicle and a
beep sounds to warn you. However,
when an Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the
doors have been securely locked by
operating the door handles or the rear
hatch opener switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked inside the vehicle, lock-
out protection is equipped with the Intelli-
gent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the
doors are locked, and then the Intelligent
Key is put inside the vehicle and all the
doors are closed; the lock will automati-
cally unlock and the door buzzer sounds.
LPD2165 LPD2167
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is op-
erating the request switch to lock the
door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
pocket or your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not func-
tion under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
the cargo cover.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
or under the spare tire area.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch
䊊
1
or the rear hatch request switch
䊊
2
.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once
and the outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch
䊊
1
again within 1 minute to unlock all
doors and the rear hatch.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch to unlock the door.
LPD2164 LPD2165
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
All doors and the rear hatch will be locked
automatically unless one of the following
operations is performed within 1 minute
after pushing the request switch.
∙ Opening any doors or the rear hatch.
∙ Engaging the ignition switch from the
locked position.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations.
∙ Placing the ignition switch to the ON
position.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-
trol.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can op-
erate all door locks using the remote key-
less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-
mote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-
hicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
∙ When the doors or the rear hatch are
open or not closed securely.
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
LPD2167
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors and the rear hatch.
3. Press the
button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors and the rear hatch will be
locked.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the
button again within
1 minute to unlock all doors and the
rear hatch.
All doors and the rear hatch will be locked
automatically unless one of the following
operations is performed within 1 minute
after pressing the
button.
∙ Opening any doors or the rear hatch.
WPD0359 WPD0360
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
∙ Engaging the ignition switch from the
lock position.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following opera-
tions.
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ACC or
ON position.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-
trol.
∙ Switching the room light switch in the
OFF position.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
the
button on the Intelligent Key for
longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
∙ The request switch on the driver or pas-
senger door or rear hatch has been
pushed and the Intelligent Key is in
range of the door handle.
WPD0374
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be
deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm that the horn beep fea-
ture has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reac-
tivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-
gered.
䊊
1
P (Park) position selecting warning
light (if so equipped)
䊊
2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning
light
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
The Intelligent Key is equipped with a func-
tion that is designed to minimize improper
operations and to help prevent the vehicle
from being stolen. The warning buzzer
sounds and the warning light illuminates
when improper operations are detected.
WPD0362
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2094
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
䊊
1
P (Park) position selecting warning
light (if so equipped)
䊊
2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning
light
CAUTION
When the buzzer sounds and the warn-
ing light illuminates, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to the
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual.
Audible reminder and warning
when locking the doors
When the chime or buzzer sounds from
inside and outside the vehicle, check for
the following:
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position.
∙ The Intelligent Key is not left inside the
vehicle.
∙ The shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position with the parking
brake fully applied.
Audible reminder and warning
when the engine stops
When the P (Park) position selecting warn-
ing light (
) in the instrument panel illu-
minates red:
∙ Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position with the parking
brake fully applied.
When the chime sounds intermittently:
∙ Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position with the parking
brake fully applied and the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK position.
If the chime sounds continuously when the
driver’s door is opened, check the following:
∙ The shift lever is placed in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position with the parking
brake fully applied and the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK position.
∙ The warning chime may stop when one
of the following is performed:
– Returning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position.
– Closing the doors.
Type B (if so equipped)
LPD2219
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Alarm and warning when the
engine starts
When the Intelligent Key system warning
light (
) blinks red and the outside
buzzer sounds, make sure the Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle.
Warning for low battery power
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the
Intelligent Key system warning light (
)
will blink green for about 30 seconds after
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition. This warning is to let you know that
the battery of the Intelligent Key will run
down soon. Replace it with a new one. For
additional information, refer to “Battery re-
placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for battery replacement.
Preventing the Intelligent Key
from being left in the vehicle
If you lock all doors using the power door
lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle, all of the doors unlock immediately
and the buzzer will warn you when the door
is closed.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(Continuously Variable
Transmission only)
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to
stop the engine
The P (Park) warning light in the instru-
ment panel illuminates and the inside
chime sounds continuously.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.
Make sure that the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When pushing the door handle re-
quest switch to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When closing the doors The P (Park) warning light in the instru-
ment panel illuminates and the out-
side chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
OFF position and the shift lever is not
in the P (Park) position.
Make sure that the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position and place the ignition
switch in the OFF position.
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or
trunk.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When closing the trunk lid
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 10 seconds and the trunk lid
opens.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When pressing the
button on
the Intelligent Key to the lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds and all the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
A door is not closed securely. Close the doors securely.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(manual transmission only)
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When the parking brake is fully applied The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When pushing the door handle re-
quest switch to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When closing the doors
The key warning light in the instru-
ment panel blinks in yellow, the out-
side chime sounds three times and
the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or
trunk.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine
The key warning light in the instru-
ment panel blinks in green.
The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one.
For additional information, refer to
“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
䊊
1
located below the instrument panel
until the hood springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever
䊊
2
in between the
hood and grille and push the lever side-
ways with your fingertips.
3. Raise the hood
䊊
3
.
4. Remove the support rod
䊊
4
and insert
it into the slot
䊊
5
.
Hold the coated parts
䊊
A
when removing
or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct
contact with the metal parts, as they
may be hot immediately after the engine
has been stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support
rod to its original position, lower the hood
to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the
latch and release it. This allows proper en-
gagement of the hood latch.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
LPD2675
HOOD
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
The rear hatch must be closed securely
before driving. An open rear hatch could
allow dangerous exhaust gases to be
drawn inside the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Exhaust gas (car-
bon monoxide)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
OPENING THE REAR HATCH
To open the rear hatch, unlock it with one of
the following operations, then pull the
handle.
∙ Push the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
∙ Unlock all doors using the key.
∙ Press the
button on the key fob (if
equipped) twice. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Remote keyless entry
system (models without NISSAN Intelli-
gent Key®)” in this section.
∙ Push the rear hatch request switch or
door handle request switch (if
equipped) twice. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®”
in this section.
∙ Press the
button on the Intelligent
Key (if equipped) twice. For additional
information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
Key®” in this section.
LPD2170
REAR HATCH
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
REAR HATCH RELEASE
The rear hatch release mechanism allows
the rear hatch to be opened in the event of
a discharged battery.
To release the rear hatch from the inside of
the vehicle, perform the following opera-
tions:
1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional
information, refer to “Folding rear seat”
in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section
of this manual.
2. Insert a suitable tool in the access
opening. Move the release lever to the
left (passenger side). The rear hatch will
be unlatched.
3. Use the exterior rear hatch handle to
open.
NOTE:
If you had to open the rear hatch using
this lever, have your vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service as soon as pos-
sible.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-
filler door securely.
LPD2366 LPD2676
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seri-
ously injured if it is misused or mis-
handled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.
∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An in-
correct cap can result in a serious mal-
function and possible injury. It could
also cause the
Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
Recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-
sage will be displayed/warning will
appear if the fuel-filler cap is not
properly tightened. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be
displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-
filler cap properly after the LOOSE
FUEL CAP warning message is
displayed/warning appears may
cause the
Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) to illuminate.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
nate. If the
light illuminates be-
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
The
light should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
NOTE:
Changing ignition switch status during
the refueling process may cause a delay
in fuel gauge response.
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-
wise to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
䊊
1
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until it
clicks.
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message
displays in the odometer when the fuel-
filler cap is not tightened correctly after the
vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be dis-
played. To turn off the warning message,
perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
previously described as soon as pos-
sible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
LPD2172
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2025
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset
button
䊊
A
in the meter for about 1 sec-
ond to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after tightening the
fuel-filler cap.
TILT OPERATION
Push the lock lever
䊊
1
down and adjust the
steering wheel up or down
䊊
2
to the de-
sired position.
Pull the lock lever
䊊
1
up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
1. To block glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor
䊊
1
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the sun visor from the center mount
and swing the visor to the side
䊊
2
.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2767
LPD2674
WPD0435
STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
3. Slide the extension
䊊
3
sun visor (if so
equipped) in or out as needed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcibly downward.
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and
turn on when the mirror cover is open.
REARVIEW MIRROR
The night position
䊊
1
reduces glare from
the headlights of vehicles behind you at
night.
Use the day position
䊊
2
when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
LPD2312 WPD0126
MIRRORS
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the in-
side mirror or glance over your shoul-
der to properly judge distances to
other objects.
The outside mirror remote control only op-
erates when the ignition switch is placed in
the ACC or ON position.
Move the small switch
䊊
1
to select the right
or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de-
sired position using the large switch
䊊
2
.
Move the small switch
䊊
1
to the center
(neutral) position to prevent accidentally
moving the mirror.
Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-
ibility. For additional information, refer to
“Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
LPD0237 LPD0259
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
MEMO
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..............4-4
How to use the touch-screen.................4-5
HowtousetheBACKbutton .................4-7
How to use the [
]button...............4-7
Clock Set .....................................4-9
button..................................4-9
How to use the ON•OFF button/VOL
(volume) control knob ........................4-9
How to use the CAMERA button ..............4-9
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ..............4-10
RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-11
How to read the displayed lines..............4-12
Difference between predicted and
actual distances.............................4-12
Adjusting the screen ........................4-14
RearView Monitor system limitations ........4-15
System maintenance........................4-16
Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) ..........4-17
Around View® Monitor system
operation....................................4-18
Difference between predicted and
actual distances.............................4-21
How to park with predicted course
lines .........................................4-23
How to switch the display ...................4-24
Adjusting the screen ........................4-25
Around View® Monitor system
limitations...................................4-25
System maintenance........................4-27
Vents...........................................4-28
Heater and air conditioner (manual) ............4-28
Controls .....................................4-29
Heater operation ............................4-30
Air conditioner operation ....................4-31
Air flow charts ...............................4-32
Servicing air conditioner........................4-36
Audio system...................................4-36
Radio........................................4-36
FM radio reception ..........................4-36
AM radio reception ..........................4-37
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .....4-37
Audio operation precautions ................4-38
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) .......................4-45
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) ..........4-49
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) ..........4-54
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) .....................4-61
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port (models with Navigation System)
(if so equipped) ..............................4-63
iPod®* player operation without
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-65
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped)......................4-68
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-71
Bluetooth® streaming audio with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-72
CD care and cleaning........................4-73
Steering Wheel Switch for Audio Control .....4-74
Antenna.....................................4-75
NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . . 4-76
Registering with NissanConnect®
Mobile Apps .................................4-76
Connect Phone..............................4-76
Application Download .......................4-76
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ..................4-77
Requirements ...............................4-77
Siri® Activation...............................4-77
Operating Siri® Eyes Free ....................4-78
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models without navigation system) .........4-79
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models with navigation system) ............4-79
Troubleshooting guide ......................4-80
Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-81
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
without Navigation System (Type A)
(if so equipped) .................................4-81
Regulatory Information ......................4-83
Using the system............................4-84
Control buttons .............................4-86
Getting started ..............................4-86
List of voice commands .....................4-88
Voice Adaptation (VA) mode .................4-92
Manual control ..............................4-94
Troubleshooting guide ......................4-94
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
without
Navigation System (Type B)
(if so equipped) .................................4-96
Regulatory information ......................4-98
Using the system............................4-98
Control buttons .............................4-99
Connecting procedure .....................4-100
Voice commands ..........................4-102
Making a call ...............................4-103
Receiving a call .............................4-103
During a call ................................4-104
Ending a call................................4-104
Text messaging (if so equipped) ............4-104
Bluetooth® settings ........................4-106
Manual control .............................4-108
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ............4-108
Regulatory information .....................4-110
Voice commands ...........................4-111
Connecting procedure ......................4-111
Vehicle phonebook ......................... 4-112
Making a call ...............................4-112
Receiving a call .............................4-112
During a call ................................ 4-112
Ending a call................................ 4-113
Text messaging ............................ 4-113
Bluetooth® settings ........................4-115
Phone settings .............................4-116
Troubleshooting guide .....................4-116
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) ................................4-118
Using the system...........................4-118
System features ............................4-119
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands...........................4-120
Navigation System voice commands ....... 4-121
Audio system voice commands ............ 4-121
Information voice commands ..............4-122
My Apps voice commands .................4-122
Help
voice commands......................4-122
Troubleshooting guide .....................4-122
WARNING
∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-
ditioning controls and display con-
trols should not be done while driving
in order that full attention may be
given to the driving operation.
∙ Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in acci-
dents, fire, or electrical shock.
∙ Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in acci-
dent, fire or electric shock.
∙ In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid on
it, or notice smoke or smell coming
from it, stop using the system imme-
diately. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
1. MAP button*
2. Display screen
3.
button**
4.
button
5.
(brightness control) button
6. BACK button
7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob
8. ON•OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
LHA3621
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
9. CAMERA button
10. NAV button*
*For additional information regarding the
navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual.
**For additional information regarding the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
control button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and
the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
the glass screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.
∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Con-
tact with liquid will cause the system
to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not avail-
able while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.
WARNING
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Result
Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Touch the “BACK” key to
return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one
item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.
Space Inserts a space.
Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the
characters.
OK Completes the character input.
LHA3748
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-
sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-
gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the pre-
vious screen.
HOW TO USE THE [ ] BUTTON
For additional information about the
“SiriusXM Travel Link”, and “Traffic” features,
refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual.
For additional information, refer to
“NissanConnect® Mobile Apps” in this sec-
tion.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.
To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.
LHA2773 LHA3748
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Menu item Result
Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this
section.
System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will
appear.
Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes
are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Clock Touch this key to adjust the time.
Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Date Format Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year.
Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” al-
lows you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key.
Set Clock Manually Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or
down. “Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.
Daylight Savings Time Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.
Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.
Color Adjust touch-screen color.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Menu item Result
Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key
on the screen is touched.
System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up
message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the
button) is pressed and held for
2 seconds.
Return to Factory Settings/Clear
Memory
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Traffic Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual.
SXM Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
CLOCK SET
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “System” key
4. Touch the “Clock” key.
5. Touch “Clock Mode” to select “Manual”
to adjust time manually.
6. Touch “Set Clock Manually”.
7. Touch “+” and “-” keys to adjust hour,
minute, day, month and year.
8. Press the BACK button to finish.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the
night display.
If no operation is performed within 5 sec-
onds, the display will return to the previous
display.
Press and hold the
button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off and
show the clock, press the button again to
turn the display back on.
HOW TO USE THE ON•OFF
BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL
KNOB
Press the ON•OFF button to turn audio
function on and off. Turn the VOL (volume)
control knob to adjust audio volume.
HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to “Rear-
View Monitor” or “Around View® Monitor” in
this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
1. CAMERA button (models with naviga-
tion)
LHA3767
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Rear-
View Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors to
be sure that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the ve-
hicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automati-
cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. Press the CAMERA button (if so
equipped) while in the R (Reverse) position
to cycle through guideline options. The ra-
dio can still be heard while the RearView
Monitor is active.
To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-
tor system uses a camera located next to
the rear hatch handle
䊊
1
.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
sition to operate the RearView Monitor.
LHA3824
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line
䊊
A
are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
∙ Red line
䊊
1
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Yellow line
䊊
2
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
3
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
4
: approx. 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines
䊊
5
Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
LHA2944
LHA4313
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up near a projecting
object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position
䊊
C
is shown farther than the
position
䊊
B
in the display. However, the po-
sition
䊊
C
is actually at the same distance as
the position
䊊
A
. The vehicle may hit the
LHA4314 LHA2946 LHA4315
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
object when backing up to the position
䊊
A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the display
settings of the screen differs depending on
the type of screen present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without navigation system:
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (Reverse).
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness
settings.
4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust
the setting up or down.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button
again to display the Contrast settings.
6. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust
the setting up or down.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to
complete the adjustment.
For vehicles with navigation system:
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (Reverse).
Models without navigation system
LHA3639
Models with navigation system
LHA3679
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
2. Press the button on the control
panel.
3. The screen will display the Night set-
tings.
4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-
ting up or down.
5. Press the
button again to access
the Auto settings.
6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-
ting up or down.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-
ner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor be-
cause of its monitoring range limita-
tion. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance be-
cause a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and out-
side mirrors.
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, ve-
hicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the rear hatch is se-
curely closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled above the license plate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage result-
ing in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong re-
flected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-
cent light.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, RearView Monitor may not dis-
play objects clearly. Clean the camera.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera
䊊
1
, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
ing it with a dry cloth.
LHA3824
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. CAMERA button
LHA3835
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so
equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for the proper use of the
Around View® Monitor system could
result in serious injury or death.
∙ The Around View® Monitor is a conve-
nience feature and is not a substitute
for proper vehicle operation because
it has areas where objects cannot be
viewed. The four corners of the vehicle
in particular, are areas where objects
do not always appear in the bird’s-
eye, front, or rear views. Always check
your surroundings to be sure that it is
safe to move before operating the ve-
hicle. Always operate the vehicle
slowly.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The Around View® Monitor system is de-
signed as an aid to the driver in situations
such as slot parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen for-
mat. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
∙ Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the front of the vehicle.
∙ Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
∙ Bird’s-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle
from above.
∙ Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
To display the multiple views, the Around
View® Monitor system uses cameras lo-
cated in the front grille, on the vehicle’s out-
side mirrors and one just above the vehi-
cle’s license plate
䊊
1
.
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
sition or press the CAMERA button to oper-
ate the Around View® Monitor.
LHA4382
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The screen displayed on the Around View®
Monitor will automatically return to the
previous screen 3 minutes after the CAM-
ERA button has been pressed with the shift
lever in a position other than the R (Re-
verse) position.
Available views
WARNING
∙ The distance guide lines and the ve-
hicle width lines should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
paved, level surface. The apparent
distance viewed on the monitor may
be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-
eye view as a reference. The lines and
the bird’s-eye view are greatly af-
fected by the number of occupants,
cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road
condition and road grade.
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-
played incorrectly.
∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-
jects viewed in the monitor are fur-
ther than they appear. When driving
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
in the monitor are closer than they
appear.
∙ Objects in the rear view will appear
visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the monitor and outside
mirrors.
∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to
properly judge distances to other
objects.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course lines and the ac-
tual course line.
∙ The vehicle width and predicted
course lines are wider than the actual
width and course.
∙ The displayed lines will appear
slightly off to the right, because the
rearview camera is not installed in the
rear center of the vehicle.
Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line
䊊
A
are
displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
∙ Red line
䊊
1
: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Yellow line
䊊
2
: approximately 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
3
: approximately 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
4
: approximately 10 ft (3 m)
Front view
SAA1840
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Vehicle width guide lines
䊊
5
:
Indicate the approximate vehicle width
when backing up.
Predicted course lines
䊊
6
:
Indicate the predicted course when oper-
ating the vehicle. The predicted course
lines will be displayed on the monitor when
the steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straight-
ahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines
䊊
6
are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.
Bird’s-eye view
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead
view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the
vehicle position and the predicted course
to a parking space.
The vehicle icon
䊊
1
shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-
tance between objects viewed in the bird’s-
eye view may differ somewhat from the
actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover
䊊
2
are indicated in black.
Rear view
SAA1896
LHA4264
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
After the ignition switched is placed in the
ON position, the non-viewable area
䊊
2
is
highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the
birds-eye view is displayed.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are
displayed in red (blink for the first 3 seconds
䊊
3
to remind the drivers to be cautious.
WARNING
∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-
pear further than the actual distance.
∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed at
the seam of the views.
∙ Objects that are above the camera
cannot be displayed.
∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
∙ A line on the ground may be mis-
aligned and is not seen as being
straight at the seam of the views. The
misalignment will increase as the line
proceeds away from the vehicle.
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line
䊊
1
shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line
䊊
2
shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the out-
side mirrors.
The extensions
䊊
3
of both the front
䊊
1
and
side
䊊
2
lines are shown with a green dotted
line.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
LHA2652
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up near a projecting
object
The predicted course lines
䊊
A
do not touch
the object in the display. However, the ve-
hicle may hit the object if it projects over
the actual backing up course.
LHA4313 LHA4314 LHA1201
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position
䊊
C
is shown farther than the
position
䊊
B
in the display. However, the po-
sition
䊊
C
is actually at the same distance as
the position
䊊
A
. The vehicle may hit the
object when backing up to the position
䊊
A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC po-
sition, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen
䊊
A
when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
LHA4315 LHA1197
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the pre-
dicted course lines
䊊
B
enter the park-
ing space
䊊
C
.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines
䊊
D
parallel
to the parking space
䊊
C
while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate
the Around View® Monitor.
The Around View® Monitor displays differ-
ent split screen views depending on the
position of the shift lever. Press the CAM-
ERA button to switch between the avail-
able views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Front view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position,
the only available view is front view/front-
side view split screen.
The display will switch from the Around
View® Monitor screen when:
∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
∙ A different screen is selected.
LHA1198
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (reverse).
2. Press the
button on the control
panel.
3. The screen will display the Night set-
tings.
4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-
ting up or down.
5. Press the
button again to access
the Auto settings.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the Around View® Monitor while the
vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
LHA4238
LHA4383
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for Around View® Monitor. Failure to op-
erate the vehicle in accordance with
these system limitations could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ Do not use the Around View® Monitor
with the outside mirrors in the stored
position, and make sure that the rear
hatch is securely closed when operat-
ing the vehicle using the Around
View® Monitor.
∙ The apparent distance between ob-
jects viewed on the Around View®
Monitor differs from the actual
distance.
∙ The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above
the rear license plate. Do not put any-
thing on the vehicle that covers the
cameras.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, wa-
ter may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
cause a malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system
will not show objects and the system does
not warn of moving objects. When in the
front or rear view display, an object below
the bumper or on the ground may not be
viewed
䊊
1
. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall
object near the seam
䊊
2
of the camera
viewing areas will not appear in the moni-
tor.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display
objects clearly.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-
cent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the Around
View® Monitor may differ somewhat
from the actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the Around View® Monitor
may not be clear and the color of the
object may differ in a dark environment.
∙ There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the
bird’s-eye view.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that
has been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the
Around View® Monitor. This will not hinder
normal driving operation but the system
should be inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice..
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiv-
ing temporary electronic disturbances
from surrounding devices. This will not hin-
der normal driving operation but the sys-
tem should be inspected. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the cameras as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras
䊊
1
, the Around View® Monitor
may not display objects clearly. Clean the
camera by wiping with a cloth dampened
with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then
wiping with a dry cloth.
LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA4382
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by
opening, closing or rotating.
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by
moving the slide as indicated
䊊
1
.
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
Side vents
SAA3126
Center vents
LHA2085
VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recir-
culation to allow fresh air into the pas-
senger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.
1.
Rear window and outside mir-
ror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
2.
Fan control dial
3.
Air conditioner button
4. Temperature control dial
5. Air intake lever (Air recirculation
and Fresh air)
6. Air flow control dial
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.
Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select
the air flow outlets.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
LHA3655
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.
Fresh air
Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion. The air flow is drawn from outside the
vehicle.
Air recirculation
Move the air intake lever to the posi-
tion to recirculate air inside the vehicle.
Use the
selection:
∙ when driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioner.
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to
the desired position and press the
button to turn on the air conditioner. The
indicator light comes on when the air con-
ditioner is operating. To turn off the air con-
ditioner, press the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position for normal heating.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
3. Turn the fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
windows, turn the fan control dial to the
maximum position and the tempera-
ture control dial to the full hot position.
∙ For additional information on how to
optimize defogging performance, refer
to the advice label on the sun visor.
When the
or position is se-
lected, press the
button to turn on
the air conditioner for better performance.
This will dehumidify the air and help defog
the windows.
Bi-level heating
This mode directs cooler air from the side
and center vents and warmer air from the
floor outlets. When the temperature con-
trol dial is moved to the full hot or full cool
position, the air between the vents and the
floor outlets is the same temperature.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ When
or are selected, the air
conditioner turns on (the indicator light
may not illuminate). This will dehumidify
the air and help defog the windows.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
the
button to activate the air condi-
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-
ing and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the
button. The indicator
light comes on.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, move the air intake
lever to the
position. Be sure to
return to the
position for normal
cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the
button. The indicator
light comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Operating tips
∙ Keep the windows closed while the air
conditioner is in operation.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or
3 minutes with the windows open to
vent hot air from the passenger com-
partment. Then, close the windows.
This allows the air conditioner to cool
the interior more quickly.
∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air in-
take lever should always be in the
position for heating and defrosting.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4602 LHA4603
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
LHA4605 LHA4606
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4607
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-
signed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-
tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper
equipment.
RADIO
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON
position, press the
(power) or ON•OFF
button to turn the radio on. If you listen to
the radio with the engine not running, the
ignition should be placed in the ACC posi-
tion.
Radio reception is affected by station sig-
nal strength, distance from radio transmit-
ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception qual-
ity.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-
hance radio reception. These circuits are
designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general charac-
teristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception
area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-
ference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect your
radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range
than stereo FM. External influences may
sometimes interfere with FM station re-
ception even if the FM station is within 25
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-
low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of
the same characteristics as light. For ex-
ample, they will reflect off objects.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interfer-
ence from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-
tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and
reflected signals reach the receiver at the
same time. The signals may cancel each
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss
of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
for several seconds during ionospheric tur-
bulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first
time or the battery has been replaced, the
satellite radio may not work properly. This
is not a malfunction. Wait more than
10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the
vehicle outside of any metal or large build-
ing for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and
“NO SAT” or “No Signal” is displayed when
the SAT band option is selected unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be af-
fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-
lite antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-
tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-
mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite
radio reception.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
∙ Do not force a compact disc into the
CD insert slot. This could damage the
CD and/or CD player.
∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD player.
∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
∙ During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
∙ The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
∙ The CD player sometimes cannot
function when the compartment
temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
∙ CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fin-
gerprints may not work properly.
∙ The following CDs may not work
properly:
∙ Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
∙ Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
∙ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
∙ Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
∙ CDs that are not round
∙ CDs with a paper label
∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
∙ This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
LHA0099
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CHECK DISC:
∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove
the CD by pressing the EJECT button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the tem-
perature of the player returns to nor-
mal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
Compact disc with MP3 or WMA
Terms
∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CD-
ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-
mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-
ceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.
∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compres-
sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-
age of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when com-
pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-
ity.
∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital mu-
sic file. The size and quality of a com-
pressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-
quency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, art-
ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-
tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the dis-
play.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-
istered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other coun-
tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
∙ The names of folders not containing
MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the
display.
∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
∙ The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing soft-
ware. Therefore, the files might not play
in the desired order.
Playback order chart
WHA1078
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Specification chart
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported
versions*1
MP3
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling fre-
quency
8kHz-48kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling fre-
quency
32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
Displayable character codes*2
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNI-
CODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot play
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of char-
acters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long
time before the music
starts playing.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music
starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit
rate files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to
the next song when play-
ing
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright
protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back
in the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-
sired order.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-
vice. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a per-
sonal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without im-
ages for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and
iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other lan-
guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB (if so equipped)
use:
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner informa-
tion regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Notes for iPod® (if so equipped) use:
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it
is connected during a seek operation. In
this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momen-
tarily black out, but will soon recover.
Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so
equipped)
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-
dio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the in-
vehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the de-
vices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.
∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-
vice in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degra-
dation and wireless connection disrup-
tion.
∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
4-44
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. CD insert slot
3. SCAN button
4. DISP (display) button
5. RPT (repeat )/ RDM (random) button
6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button
7. AUX IN jack
8. AUX button
9. CD button
10. AM button
11. FM button
12. VOL (volume) control knob
/
(power) button
13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14. TRACK
button
15.
SEEK button
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) control knob/
(power) button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the
(power) but-
ton. If you listen to the radio with the engine
not running, place the ignition in the ACC
position. The mode (radio or CD) that was
playing immediately before the system
was turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the
(power) button again
turns the system off.
LHA8804
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the
right to increase volume or to the left to
decrease volume.
MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance,
Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and
Clock)
Press the MENU button to change the
mode as follows:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade → Spd.
Sen. Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) → AUX IN
Volume → Clock → Clock Adjust
To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-
ance, press the MENU button until the de-
sired mode appears in the display. Press
the
SEEK or TRACK button to
adjust the setting to the desired level (-5 to
+5). Balance adjusts the sound between
the right and left speakers. Fade adjusts
the sound between the front and rear
speakers.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality
to the desired level, press the MENU button
repeatedly until the radio or CD display re-
appears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear after about
10 seconds.
Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the vol-
ume of the audio system as the vehicle’s
driving speed changes. It can be set as
follows:
OFF → LOW → MID → HIGH
DISP (display) button
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is
playing to change the text shown in the
audio display as follows:
For CDs:
Running Time → Album Title: → Artist
Name: → Song Title
For MP3 CDs:
Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title:
→ Artist Name: → Song Title:
If the text information is too long to fully be
displayed on the screen; press and hold the
DISP button for longer than 1.5 seconds to
scroll through the rest of the text.
Press the DISP (display) button while the
radio is playing to toggle the audio display
between station number and RDS.
Clock operation
To turn the clock display on or off, press the
MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” ap-
pears on the display. Turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to toggle the setting
(ON or OFF).
Clock set
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“Adjust Clock: NO” appears on the dis-
play.
2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
change to “Adjust Clock: YES”.
3. Press the MENU button.
4. When “Change Hour” appears, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
hours.
5. Press MENU button.
6. When “Change Minute” appears, turn
the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust min-
utes.
7. Press MENU button to finish.
The display will return to the regular clock
display after 10 seconds if no further ad-
justment is performed.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
FM/AM radio operation
AM and FM buttons
Press the AM button to change the band to
AM.
If another audio source is playing when the
AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin play-
ing.
Press the FM button to change the band as
follows:
FM1 → FM2 → FM1
If another audio source is playing when the
FM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin play-
ing.
SEEK and TRACK
(tuning) buttons
Press the SEEK button
to tune from
low to high frequencies and stop at the
next broadcasting station.
Press the TRACK button
to tune from
high to low frequencies and stop at the
next broadcasting station.
Press and hold either button to seek at a
faster speed.
SCAN (tuning) button
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in
the display window. Scan tuning begins
from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning
stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting
station that has sufficient signal strength.
When scanning, SCAN blinks in the display.
Pressing the SCAN button again during this
5 second period stops scan tuning and the
radio remains tuned to that station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be
set for the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep
sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Pro-
gramming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-
celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-
tions.
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact
disc into the slot with the label side up. The
compact disc is automatically pulled into
the slot and starts to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automati-
cally turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio turns off and the last used compact
disc starts to play.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
SEEK and TRACK
(Fast Forward, Rewind)
buttons
When the SEEK button
or
TRACK
button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc
plays at an increased speed while fast for-
warding or rewinding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to nor-
mal play speed.
SEEK and TRACK
buttons
When the SEEK button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track
following the present one starts to play from
the beginning. Press the SEEK
button
several times to skip several tracks. Each
time the button is pressed, the CD advances
one additional track. The track number ap-
pears in the display window. (When the last
track on the compact disc is skipped, the first
track is played.)
When the TRACK button is pressed,
the track being played returns to the be-
ginning. Press the TRACK
button sev-
eral times to skip back several tracks. Each
time the button is pressed the CD moves
back one track.
RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button
Press the RPT/RDM button while a com-
pact disc is playing to change the play pat-
tern as follows:
CD:
TRACK REPEAT → DISC RANDOM → DISC
REPEAT
MP3/WMA CD:
FOLDER REPEAT → TRACK REPEAT → DISC
RANDOM → FOLDER RANDOM → DISC RE-
PEAT
TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently
playing will be repeated.
DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on
the disc will be mixed during play.
DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will
be repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current
folder will be repeated.
FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in
the folder will be mixed during play.
SCAN (CDs) button
Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 sec-
onds to scan all tracks of the current disc
for 10 seconds per track. The SCAN icon is
flashed during scan mode.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans
through all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN
button is pressed during scan mode.
CD EJECT
When the
button is pressed with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
be ejected.
When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc
will eject and the system will turn off.
AUX (Auxiliary) button
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
player or laptop computers.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN
jack.
Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“AUX IN Volume” appears on the screen to
control the incoming volume level of the
auxiliary input device. Turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the level be-
tween 0 and +3.
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. RPT button
3. RDM button
4. Display screen
5. SCAN button
6.
SEEK/CAT buttons
7. iPod MENU button
8.
BACK button
9. ENTER/SETTING/CLOCK button (Type
A) (if so equipped) or ENTER/SETTING
button (Type B) (if so equipped) and
TUNE/SCROLL control knob
10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11.
VOL (volume) knob /
(power) button
12. DISP button
13. MEDIA button
14. XM button*
15. FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional sat-
ellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.
LHA4457
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the
(power) but-
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-
just the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the op-
tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Clock Adjust Allows the user to set time manually.
On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Speed Sensitive Vol. (Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the ve-
hicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to
vehicle speed.
AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no ad-
ditional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Language Select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Auto Source Change Select ON or OFF for the Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is plugged into USB port,
radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change OFF: when device is plugged into USB port,
radio will stay on currently selected source.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the
item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display
returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Clock Set (Type A) (if so equipped)
1. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Clock Adjust”.
3. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.
4. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to ad-
just hours.
5. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.
6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
minutes.
7. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.
8. Press the
BACK button to finish.
Clock Set (Type B) (if so equipped)
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Clock Adjust”.
3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to ad-
just hours.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
minutes.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
8. Press the
BACK button to finish.
iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® op-
erations.For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation without Navigation
System” in this section regarding the func-
tion of this button.
BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin play-
ing.
XM band select
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1
When the XM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last
played.
The last station played will also come on
when the VOL/
control knob is
pressed ON.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satel-
lite radio reception will not be available un-
less an optional satellite receiver and an-
tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satel-
lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
SEEK tuning
Press the SEEK button
or to
tune from low to high or high to low fre-
quencies and to stop at the next broad-
casting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can
be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for
XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or
choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or
XM3 using the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and
the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Pro-
gramming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-
celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-
tions.
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automati-
cally turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text informa-
tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the cur-
rent disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or for 1.5 seconds while the compact
disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays
at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is re-
leased, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK/CAT button
Press the SEEK/CAT button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
the SEEK/CAT button
several times
to skip backward several tracks.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Press the SEEK/CAT button while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last
track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is dis-
played on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is dis-
played on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
EJECT button
When the
button is pressed with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
eject and the last source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 20 sec-
onds, the disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models without Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-
gation System” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. FM-AM button
3. AUX button
4. CD insert slot
5.
Backward seek button and
Forward seek button
6. BACK button
7. TUNE knob / AUDIO button
8. Display screen
9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
10. CD button
11. SXM button*
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the SXM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional sat-
ellite receiver and antenna are installed
and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service sub-
scription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Audio main operation
ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the ON-OFF button
while the system is off to call up the mode
(radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio USB or
iPod®) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off.
LHA2895
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF
button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-
just the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
Audio settings
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Use the touch-screen to adjust the follow-
ing items to the desired setting:
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the
speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the
volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Avail-
able options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust.
When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the
main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
SXM settings
To view the SXM settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and
other information are displayed on the
screen.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin play-
ing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio automatically changes from ste-
reo to monaural reception.
SXM band select
Pressing the SXM button will change the
band as follows:
SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3*→ SXM1* (satellite, if
so equipped)
When the SXM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the last station
played.
The last station played will also come on
when the ON-OFF button is pressed.
*When the SXM button is pressed, the sat-
ellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio
is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
While the radio is in SXM mode, the opera-
tion can be controlled through the touch-
screen. Touch the “Channels” key to display
a list of channels. Touch a channel dis-
played on the list to change to that chan-
nel. Touch the “Categories” key to display a
list of categories. Touch a category dis-
played on the list to display options within
that category.
Tuning with the touch-screen
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be
tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up
the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the
lower right corner of the screen. A screen
appears with a bar running from low fre-
quencies on the left to high frequencies on
the right. Touch the screen at the location
of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To
return to the regular radio display screen,
touch the “OK” key.
Tuning with the TUNE control knob
The radio can also be manually tuned us-
ing the TUNE knob.When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher fre-
quencies. When in SXM mode, turn the
TUNE knob to change the channel.
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SEEK tuning
When in FM or AM mode, press the seek
buttons
or to tune from low to
high or high to low frequencies and to stop
at the next broadcasting station.
When in SXM mode, press the seek
buttons
or to change the cat-
egory.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1 and six for FM2) and six stations
can be set for the AM band. Eighteen sta-
tions can be set for the SXM band (six for
SXM1, six for SXM2 and six for SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or
choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2,
SXM3 using the SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual or seek tuning. Touch and hold
any of the desired station memory
keys (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Pro-
gramming is now complete.
4. Other keys can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-
celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-
tions.
Presets can also be selected by touching
the desired preset number on the screen.
LHA2899
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if
so equipped)
The Smart Favorites feature allows the
user to designate presets, within the SXM1,
SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Fa-
vorites. When any of the Smart Favorite
presets are selected, the current track on
that station will play from the beginning of
the song.
To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate
(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favor-
ites.
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
For additional information, refer to “1 to 6
Station memory operations” in this section.
NOTE:
• Smart Favorites will start functioning
only after the audio unit is turned on for
a few minutes.
• Tune Start is supported for music chan-
nels only.
Replay Screen
The Replay Screen gives the user the ability
to replay, skip, pause or rewind the cur-
rently aired track.
When the “Replay” key is touched, the Re-
play Screen is prompted.
LHA3085 LHA3087
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
REPLAY To replay a track from
the beginning, press
the
seek button.
The user can continue to
press the
seek but-
ton to replay previous
songs, but can only go
back as far as the sys-
tem permits. The system
will warn the user when
they cannot skip any fur-
ther back by displaying
“At the End” in the bot-
tom left corner of the
screen.
SKIP To skip a track, press
the
track button.
“Live” will appear in the
bottom left corner of the
screen indicating the dif-
ference from play time to
live audio.
PAUSE To pause a track, press
the
pause button.
REWIND/
FAST
FORWARD
To rewind/ fast forward a
track, hold the
or seek/track
button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4-59
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automati-
cally turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded,
the system will turn on and the compact
disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and
the compact disc will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded
with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is dis-
played listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when
aCDisplaying:
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-
ing “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.
Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching
“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text
will appear on the display. To cancel repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer
highlighted
Browse Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the
list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the
folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a
folder.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
Press and hold the SEEK buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while the compact
disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays
at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is re-
leased, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK buttons
Press the SEEK button
while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK button
several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK button
while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one
track. Press the SEEK button
several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track on a CD is skipped, the first track
on the disc is played. If the last track in a
folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
AUX button
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX
button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack.
EJECT button
When the
button is pressed with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
eject and the last source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,
the disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation with Navigation System”
in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models with Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Naviga-
tion System” in this section.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
LHA4358
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB connection port is located be-
neath the heater and air conditioner con-
trols. Insert the USB device into the connec-
tion port.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compat-
ible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to
switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack located on the
instrument panel, the MEDIA button
toggles between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played can be displayed on the display
screen of the vehicle’s audio system. De-
pending on how the audio files are en-
coded, information such as Folder, Song
and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total
tracks in the folder are displayed on the
screen as well.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Reverse or Fast For-
ward) button
Press and hold the
or SEEK/CAT
and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to
reverse or fast forward the track being
played. The track plays at an increased
speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to return to the beginning of the
current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
button
several times to skip back-
ward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to advance one track. Press the
SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will
be played randomly.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pat-
tern is applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pat-
tern is applied.
TUNE/SCROLL knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files
on the USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob and press the ENTER/SETTING but-
ton to change folders. Turn the knob to the
left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob to
the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is
only one folder of audio files on the USB
device, turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob in
either direction will return to the first track
on the USB device.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
LHA4358
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB connection port is located be-
neath the heater and air conditioner con-
trols. Insert the USB device into the connec-
tion port.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compat-
ible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX (auxiliary) button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another
audio source is playing and a USB memory
device is inserted, press the AUX button
until the center display changes to the USB
memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
USB memory was playing, press the ON-
OFF button to restart the USB memory.
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played is shown on the display screen of
the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”
to display the list of folders and files on the
USB device. Touch the name of a song on
the screen to begin playing that song.
SEEK buttons
Press the
button while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
the
button several times to skip
backward several tracks.
LHA4006
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Press the button while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the
button several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
Random and repeat play mode
While files on a USB device are playing, the
play pattern can be altered so that songs
are repeated or played randomly.
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random
play pattern to the USB device. When the
random mode is active, the
icon is
displayed to the left of the song title or
album name to denote which random pat-
tern is applied. To cancel Random mode,
touch the “Random” key until no
icon
is displayed.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the USB device. When the
repeat mode is active, the
icon is dis-
played to the left of the song title or album
name to denote which repeat pattern is
applied. To cancel repeat mode, touch the
“Repeat” key until no
icon is displayed.
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB Connection port located beneath
the heater and air conditioner controls.
Connect the iPod®-specific end of the
cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the
cable to the USB Connection port on the
vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via
a USB connection, its battery will be
LHA4358
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
charged while connected to the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB Connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version
1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.0.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB)
(firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware
version 3.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware
version 4.3.5 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)
∙ iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-
dated to the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the iPod MENU button
or MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to
the iPod® mode.
If the audio system is turned off while the
iPod® is playing, the iPod® plays when the
audio system is turned back on.
If the audio system is off, pressing the iPod
MENU button or MEDIA button turns the
audio system on and plays the iPod®.
If the audio system is on, the audio system
automatically begins playing tracks from
the iPod® when it is plugged into the con-
nection port.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
iPod MENU button
Press the iPod MENU button while the
iPod® is connected to show the iPod® op-
eration menu on the audio display. Scroll
through the menu list using the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. Press the
ENTER/SETTING button to select a menu
item. Items in the iPod® menu appear on
the display in the following order:
∙ Now playing
∙ Playlists
∙ Artists
∙ Albums
∙ Songs
∙ Podcasts
∙ Genres
∙ Composers
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Shuffle songs
For additional information, refer to the
iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each
item.
MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button re-
peatedly with an iPod® connected to
switch to the iPod® input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack located on the
instrument panel, the MEDIA button
toggles between the available sources.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
or to skip backward or
forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while
a track is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast
forwarding. When the button is released,
the track returns to normal play speed.
(RPT) REPEAT
When the RPT button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are
repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is ap-
plied.
(RDM) RANDOM
When the RDM button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list
will be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is ap-
plied.
BACK button
When the
BACK button is pressed, it
returns to the previous menu.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB Connection port located beneath
the heater and air conditioner controls.
Connect the iPod®-specific end of the
cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the
cable to the USB Connection port on the
vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via
a USB connection, its battery will be
charged while connected to the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB Connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)*
∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
LHA4358
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-
dated to the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
iPod® was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the
iPod®.
AUX button
When the AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPod® connected, the
system will turn on. If another audio source
is playing and the iPod® is connected, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the iPod® mode.
LHA4007
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Interface
The interface for iPod® operation shown on
the vehicle’s audio system display screen is
similar to the iPod® interface. Use the
touch-screen, BACK button or the TUNE
knob to navigate the menus on the screen.
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”
key to bring up the iPod® interface.
Depending on the iPod® model, the follow-
ing items may be available on the menu list
screen. For additional information about
each item, refer to the iPod® Owner’s
Manual.
∙ Playlists
∙ Artists
∙ Albums
∙ Genres
∙ Songs
∙ Composers
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Podcasts
∙ Update Music Library
Shuffle and repeat play mode
Item Result
Shuffle and repeat play mode
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.
Shuffle
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play pattern to the iPod®. When the shuffle mode is ac-
tive it will appear on the screen. To cancel shuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key until it is not
displayed.
Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is active
it will appear on the screen. To cancel repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until it is not displayed.
LHA2907
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SEEK buttons
Press the SEEK button
or to
skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK button
or for 1.5 seconds while a track is
playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the
track returns to normal play speed.
Scrolling menus
While navigating long lists of artists, al-
bums or songs in the music menu, it is
possible to scroll the list by the first charac-
ter in the name. To activate character in-
dexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the
upper right corner of the screen. Turn the
TUNE knob to choose the number or letter
to jump to in the list and then press the
AUDIO button.
If no character is selected after 2 seconds,
the display returns to normal.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehi-
cle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers. For additional information, refer
to “FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type A)” in this section.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual.
LHA2279
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
the “Bluetooth” option.
3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Add Phone”. This same screen can be
accessed to remove, replace or select a
different Bluetooth® device.
4. The system acknowledges the com-
mand and asks you to initiate connect-
ing from the phone handset. The con-
necting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to
toggle through the following menu op-
tions;
∙ Album
∙ Song
∙ Artist
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehi-
cle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
LHA2775 LHA2773
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
5. The system acknowledges the com-
mand and asks you to initiate connect-
ing from the phone handset. The con-
necting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissancanada.com/bluetooth for
instructions on connecting NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
displayed on the screen.
CD CARE AND CLEANING
∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend
the disc. Never touch the surface of the
disc.
∙ Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
∙ Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-
trial use.
LHA2844 LHA0049
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil as
illustrated.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
1. SOURCE switch
2. Tuning switch
3. Volume control switch
SOURCE switch
Push the SOURCE switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) → XM2 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) → XM3 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) → CD* → USB/iPod®* (if so
equipped) → Bluetooth® Audio* (if so
equipped) → AUX* → AM.
* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.
Type A (if so equipped)
LHA3636
Type B (if so equipped)
LHA3052
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Volume control switches
Push the volume control switch to increase
or decrease the volume.
Tuning switch
For most audio sources, pressing the
switches for more than 1.5 seconds pro-
vides a different function than pressing for
less than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM:
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
preset station.
∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the
next station.
XM (if so equipped):
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
preset station.
∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to go to the next or previous
channel.
iPod® (if so equipped):
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.
CD:
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.
∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
folder number (if playing compressed
audio files).
USB (if so equipped):
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
track number.
∙ Push the
switch for more than
1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the
folder number.
Bluetooth® Audio (if so equipped):
∙ Push the
switch for less than
1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the
next song.
ANTENNA
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can
be removed. When you need to remove the
antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-
clockwise.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
rod clockwise and hand tighten.
CAUTION
∙ Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle
operation.
∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an auto-
matic car wash.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone
Integration technology. This allows many
compatible Smartphone applications to
be displayed and easily controlled through
the vehicle’s touch-screen.
NOTE:
A compatible smartphone and registra-
tion is required to use mobile applica-
tions or to access connected features of
certain vehicle applications.
REGISTERING WITH
NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS
To use the Smartphone Integration feature,
it is necessary for the user to register. In
order to register, visit the NissanConnect®
Mobile Apps website,
www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
www.nissan.ca/en/connect or
www.nissan.ca/fr/connect and sign up or
create an account through the prompts on
the NissanConnect Mobile Apps. Once reg-
istered, download the NissanConnect Mo-
bile Apps from your compatible phone’s
application download source and then log
into the application. If you already have an
account created through the App, please
log in.
CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smart-
phone must be connected via Bluetooth®
or USB to the vehicle. For additional infor-
mation on connecting your phone, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
NOTE:
For vehicles with a navigation system,
Apple iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be
plugged in via USB for NissanConnect
Mobile Apps to function.
For vehicles without a navigation sys-
tem, Apple iPhones® must be paired via
Bluetooth® for NissanConnect Mobile
Apps to function.
NOTE:
For Android phones, NissanConnect Mo-
bile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
paired via Bluetooth®.
APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
Once connected, the NissanConnect App
will search your phone to determine which
compatible applications are currently in-
stalled. The user will then choose which apps
they want to bring into their vehicle from the
list of apps within the “Manage My Apps” sec-
tion of the NissanConnect App on their
smartphone. The vehicle will then download
the in-vehicle interface for each of these
compatible applications. Once downloaded,
the user can access their selected smart-
phone applications through the vehicle
touch-screen. For additional information, re-
fer to www.nissanusa.com/connect or
www.nissan.ca/en/connect or
www.nissan.ca/fr/connect regarding appli-
cation availability.
NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (if
so equipped)
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-
tion by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
from the
/ TALK switch on the
steering wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
displaying pictures or opening apps,
may not be available while driving.
∙ For best results, always update your de-
vice to the latest software version.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recogniz-
ing the voice commands correctly.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.
REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free sys-
tem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for de-
tails about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.
SIRI® ACTIVATION
Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
pushing
/ TALK switch on the
steering wheel.
Models with navigation system
1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Connecting pro-
cedure” in this section.
Type A (if so equipped)
LHA2499
SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-
tablished, push and hold
the
/ TALK switch to activate
the Siri Eyes Free function.
Models without navigation system
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Initialization” in
this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-
tablished, the switch operation select
screen is displayed.
3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for
Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action
can also be changed from the
Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing
Siri Eyes Free Settings (models without
navigation system)” in this section.
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold
the
/ TALK switch.
2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push
the
/ TALK switch again within
5 seconds of the end of the Siri Eyes Free
announcement to extend the session.
Example 1 – Playing music
1. Push or push and hold
the
/ TALK switch.
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,
etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
when the music starts playing. Mode
selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to re-
sume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control func-
tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example2–Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-
play a notification for new incoming
text messages.
2. After reading the message, push or
push and hold the
/ TALK
switch to reply using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-
sage” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.
Type B (if so equipped)
LHA4309
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models without
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-
tings” in this section.
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Siri” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” us-
ing the TUNE/SCROLL knob and then
press the ENTER/SETTING button.
CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models with
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-
tings” in this section.
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.
5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set the activation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from switch
on the steering wheel
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Models without navigation system:
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must
push and hold the
/ TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free.
If the setting is “Short Press”, a short push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.
Audio Source does not change automati-
cally to iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook
or other 3rd party music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may
degrade performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select
switch on the steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track, previous track or
play timer does not work
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook
or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Cannot hear any music/audio being
played back from a connected iPhone®
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod®
mode.
Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direction
guidance from a connected iPhone®
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod®
mode.
Cannot receive text message notifications
on the vehicle audio system
Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device
name, like “My Car”. Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
Cannot reply to text message notifications
by Siri Eyes Free
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold
the
/ TALK switch on the steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.
WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle op-
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode is highly
recommended. Exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
hicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone
connecting procedure is required. Your
phone is automatically connected with the
in-vehicle phone module when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position with the
previously connected cellular phone turned
on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® de-
vices. If your phone does not connect au-
tomatically to the system, consult the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on
device operation.
You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before us-
ing the hands-free phone system.
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting in-
structions.
LHA4307
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an under-
ground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
vent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other per-
son’s voice during a call.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the cellu-
lar phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.
You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
ent location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-
ing the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
tenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system al-
lows hands-free operation of the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-
ized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce
“Hands-free phone system not ready” and
will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-
vent the system from recognizing voice
commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press and release the
button located
on the steering wheel. After the tone
sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
∙ If you need to hear the available com-
mands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by say-
ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-
nounces “Cancel” and ends the Voice
Recognition session. You can also press
and hold the
button on the steer-
ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-
sion is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the volume con-
trol switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feed-
back. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.
∙ In most cases you can interrupt the
voice feedback to speak the next com-
mand by pressing the
button on
the steering wheel.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ To use the system faster, you may
speak the second level commands with
the main menu command on the main
menu. For example, press the
but-
ton and after the tone say, “Call Redial.”
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-
tain way to speak numbers in voice com-
mands. Refer to the following rules and ex-
amples.
∙ Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two
oh oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six
two oh oh”
∙ Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight hundred six six two six
two oh oh”,
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two
sixty two hundred,” and
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty
two hundred”
∙ Numbers can be spoken in small
groups. The system will prompt you to
continue entering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six two zero zero”
∙ Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Special Number”
command and the “Send” command
during a call).
For additional information, refer to “List
of voice commands” and “Special
number” in this section.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two
star one two three”
∙ Say “plus” for “+” (available only when us-
ing the “Special Number” command).
∙ Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (avail-
able only when storing a phonebook
number).
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at
any time. Please use the “Help” command
to get information on how to use the sys-
tem.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
example, press the
button and after
the tone say, “Call Redial”.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initi-
ate a Voice Recognition ses-
sion or answer an incoming
call.
You can also use the
button to interrupt the sys-
tem feedback and give a
command at once. For addi-
tional information, refer to
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section.
PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition
system is active, press and
hold the
button for
5 seconds to quit the Voice
Recognition system at any
time.
Tuning switch
While using the Voice Recog-
nition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manu-
ally control the phone system.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recogni-
tion. For additional information, refer to “List
of voice commands” in this section.
Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System using English,
Spanish or French.
To change the language, perform the fol-
lowing.
1. Press and hold the
button for
more than 5 seconds.
2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND
button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
voice adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END
button to select a
different language.”
3. Press the
button.
For information on voice adaptation,
refer to “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in
this section.
4. The system announces the current
language and gives you the option to
change the language to Spanish (in
Spanish) or French (in French). To select
the current language, press
the
button. To select a different
language, tilt the
tuning switch up
or down.
LHA2499
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
You must press the
button within
5 seconds to change the language.
5. If you decide not to change the lan-
guage, do not press either button. After
5 seconds, the NISSAN Voice Recogni-
tion session will end, and the language
will not be changed.
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
Main Menu
“Connect phone”
䊊
A
“Add phone”
䊊
B
Initiate from handset
䊊
C
Name phone
䊊
D
1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the
available commands.
2. Say: “Connect phone”
䊊
A
. The system
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available com-
mands.
3. Say: “Add phone”
䊊
B
. The system ac-
knowledges the command and asks
you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset
䊊
C
.
The connecting procedure of the cellu-
lar phone varies according to each cel-
lular phone model. For additional infor-
mation, refer to the cellular phone
Owner’s Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for in-
structions on connecting NISSAN rec-
ommended cellular phones.
When prompted for a Pin code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Pin code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN
and cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for
the phone
䊊
D
.
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for
a name again.
Also, if more than one phone is con-
nected and the name sounds too
much like a name already used, the
system tells you, then prompts you for
a name again.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
“Call”
䊊
A
“Phone Number”
䊊
B
Speak the digits
䊊
C
“Dial”
䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
2. Say: “Call”
䊊
A
. The system acknowl-
edges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
3. Say “Phone Number”
䊊
B
. The system
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available com-
mands.
Say: “Special Number” to dial more
than 10 digits or any special charac-
ters.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
4. Say the number you wish to call start-
ing with the area code in single digit
format
䊊
C
. If the system has trouble
recognizing the correct phone number,
try entering the number in the follow-
ing groups: 3-digit area code, 3-digit
prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three
five four” as the 3rd group. For dialing
more than 10 digits or any special char-
acters, say “Special Number”. For addi-
tional information refer to “How to say
numbers” in this section.
5. When you have finished speaking the
phone number, the system repeats it
back and announces the available
commands.
6. Say: “Dial”
䊊
D
. The system acknowl-
edges the command and makes the
call.
For additional command options, refer to
“List of voice commands” in this section.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press
the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the
button on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when
you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, refer to
“List of voice commands” in this section.
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
When you press and release the but-
ton on the steering wheel, you can choose
from the commands on the Main Menu. The
following pages describe these commands
and the commands in each sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to
hear the list of commands currently avail-
able any time the system is waiting for a
response.
If you want to end an action without com-
pleting it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at
any time the system is waiting for a re-
sponse. The system will end the Voice Rec-
ognition session. Whenever the Voice Rec-
ognition session is canceled, a double beep
is played to indicate you have exited the
system.
If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”
any time the system is waiting for a re-
sponse.
“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name)
䊊
A
“Phone Number”
(Speak Digits)
䊊
B
“Special Number”
䊊
C
“Redial”
䊊
D
“Call Back”
䊊
E
(Speak name)
䊊
A
If you have stored entries in the phone-
book, you can dial a number associated
with a name.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
For additional information, refer to “Phone-
book (phones without automatic phone-
book download function)” in this section.
When prompted by the system, say the
name of the phone book entry you wish to
call. The system acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple numbers associated
with the name, the system asks you to
choose the correct number.
Once you have confirmed the name and
location, the system begins the call.
(Speak Digits)
䊊
B
When prompted by the system, say the
number you wish to call. For additional in-
formation, refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone
number” in this section.
“Special Number”
䊊
C
For dialing more than 10 digits or any spe-
cial characters, say “Special Number”. When
the system acknowledges the command,
the system will prompt you to speak the
number.
“Redial”
䊊
D
Use the Redial command to call the last
number that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the sys-
tem announces, “There is no number to
redial” and ends the Voice Recognition ses-
sion.
“Call Back”
䊊
E
Use the Call Back command to dial the
number of the last incoming call within the
vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a call back number does not exist, the
system announces, “There is no number to
call back” and ends the Voice Recognition
session.
During a call
During a call there are several command
options available. Press the
button
on the steering wheel to mute the receiv-
ing voice and enter commands.
∙ “Help” — The system announces the
available commands.
∙ “Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the Voice Rec-
ognition session and returns to the call.
∙ “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the Voice Recognition
session and returns to the call.
∙ “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”
during a call. For example, if you were
directed to dial an extension by an au-
tomated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the com-
mand and sends the tones associated
with the numbers. The system then
ends the Voice Recognition session
and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
∙ “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
to the cellular phone when privacy is
desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call.
Call transferred to privacy mode.” The
system then ends the Voice Recogni-
tion session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular
phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, press the
button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
∙ “Mute” — Use the Mute command to
mute your voice so the other party can-
not hear it. Use the mute command
again to unmute your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the
Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will
be reset to “off” for the next call so the
other party can hear your voice.
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not
available when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“Transfer Entry”
䊊
A
“Delete Entry”
䊊
B
“List Names”
䊊
C
For phones that do not support automatic
download of the phonebook (PBAP
Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” com-
mand is used to manually add entries to
the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for
each phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s
phonebook if you are currently con-
nected with Phone B.
“Transfer Entry”
䊊
A
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a
new name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the
name you would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a
name already stored, the system tells you,
then prompts you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s
memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” For additional information, refer to
“How to say numbers” in this section.
To transfer a phone number stored in the
cellular phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initi-
ate the transfer from the phone handset.
The new contact phone number will be
transferred from the cellular phone via the
Bluetooth® communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to
each cellular phone. For additional infor-
mation, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
The system repeats the number and
prompts you for the next command. When
you have finished entering numbers or
transferring an entry, choose “Store.”
The system confirms the name, location
and number.
“Delete Entry”
䊊
B
Use the Delete Entry command to erase
one entry from the phonebook. After the
system recognizes the command, speak
the name to delete or say “List Names” to
choose an entry.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
“List Names”
䊊
C
Use the List Names command to hear all
the names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries
but does not include the actual phone
numbers. When the playback of the list is
complete, the system goes back to the
main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any
time by pressing the
button on the
steering wheel. The system ends the Voice
Recognition session.
“Phonebook” (phones with
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not
available when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
Say a Name
“List Names”
䊊
A
“Record Name”
䊊
B
For phones that support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth®
profile), the “Phonebook” command is used
to manage entries in the vehicle phone-
book. You can say the name of an entry at
this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1,000 names
for each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system,
the phonebook is automatically down-
loaded to the vehicle. This feature allows
you to access your phonebook from the
Bluetooth® system and call contacts by
name. You can record a custom voice tag
for contact names that the system has dif-
ficulty recognizing.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s
phonebook if you are currently con-
nected with Phone B. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Record name” in this
section.
“List Names”
䊊
A
Use the List Names command to hear all
the names and locations in the phone
book.
The system recites the phone book entries
but does not include the actual phone
numbers. When the playback of the list is
complete, the system goes back to the
main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any
time by pressing the
button on the
steering wheel. The system ends the
NISSAN Voice Recognition session. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Record name”
in this section.
“Record Name”
䊊
B
The system allows you to record custom
voice tags for contact names in the phone-
book that the vehicle has difficulty recog-
nizing. This feature can also be used to re-
cord voice tags to directly dial an entry with
multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice tags can
be recorded to the system.
“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
“Outgoing”
䊊
A
“Incoming”
䊊
B
“Missed”
䊊
C
Use the Recent Calls command to access
outgoing, incoming or missed calls.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
“Outgoing”
䊊
A
Use the Outgoing command to list the out-
going calls made from the vehicle.
“Incoming”
䊊
B
Use the Incoming command to list the in-
coming calls made to the vehicle.
“Missed”
䊊
C
Use the Missed command to list the calls
made to the vehicle that were not an-
swered.
“Connect Phone”
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
“Add Phone”
䊊
A
“Select Phone”
䊊
B
“Delete Phone”
䊊
C
“Replace Phone”
䊊
D
“Bluetooth OFF”
䊊
E
“Phonebook Download OFF”
䊊
F
“Display Settings”
䊊
G
Use the Connect Phone commands to
manage the phones connecting to the ve-
hicle or to enable the Bluetooth® function
on the vehicle.
“Add Phone”
䊊
A
Use the Add Phone command to add a
phone to the vehicle. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Connecting procedure” in
this section.
“Select Phone”
䊊
B
Use the Select Phone command to select
from a list of phones connected to the ve-
hicle. The system will list the names as-
signed to each phone and then prompt
you for the phone you wish to select. Only
one phone can be active at a time.
“Delete Phone”
䊊
C
Use the Delete Phone command to delete
a phone that is connected to the vehicle.
The system will list the names assigned to
each phone and then prompt you for the
phone you wish to delete. Deleting a phone
from the vehicle will also delete the phone-
book for that phone.
“Replace Phone”
䊊
D
Use the Replace Phone command to re-
place an existing phone pairing with a new
phone. The system will keep all voice tags
assigned to your phonebook.
“Bluetooth OFF”
䊊
E
Use the Bluetooth OFF command to pre-
vent a wireless connection to your phone.
“Phonebook Download OFF”
䊊
F
Use the Phonebook Download OFF com-
mand to turn off the automatic download-
ing of the handset phonebook to the avail-
able (if supported by the cellular phone).
When the command is recognized, “Sync
Contacts OFF” will appear on the audio dis-
play.
To turn the feature back on, say “Phone-
book Download”. When the command is
recognized, “Sync Contacts ON” will appear
on the audio display.
VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE
Voice Adaptation (VA) allows up to two out-
of-dialect users to train the system to im-
prove recognition accuracy. By repeating a
number of commands, the users can cre-
ate a voice model of their own voice that is
stored in the system. The system is ca-
pable of storing a different Voice Adapta-
tion model for each connected phone.
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as fol-
lows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably
quiet outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in P (Park).
3. Press and hold the
button for
more than 5 seconds.
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND
button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
voice adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END
button to select a
different language.”
5. Press the
button.
For additional information on selecting
a different language, refer to “Choosing
a language” in this section.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is se-
lected automatically. If both memory
locations are already in use, the system
will prompt you to overwrite one. Fol-
low the instructions provided by the
system.
7. When preparation is complete and you
are ready to begin, press the
but-
ton.
8. The Voice Adaptation mode will be ex-
plained. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
9. When training is finished, the system
will tell you an adequate number of
phrases have been recorded.
10. The system will announce that voice
adaptation has been completed and
the system is ready.
The Voice Adaptation mode will stop if:
∙ The
button is pressed for more
than 5 seconds in Voice Adaptation
mode.
∙ The vehicle begins moving during Voice
Adaptation mode.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
or LOCK position.
Training phrases
During the Voice Adaptation mode, the sys-
tem instructs the trainer to say the follow-
ing phrases. The system will prompt you for
each phrase.
∙ phonebook transfer entry
∙ dial three oh four two nine
∙ delete call back number
∙ incoming
∙ transfer entry
∙ eight pause nine three two pause seven
∙ delete all entries
∙ call seven two four zero nine
∙ phonebook delete entry
∙ next entry
∙ dial star two one seven oh
∙yes
∙no
∙ select
∙ missed
∙ dial eight five six nine two
∙ Bluetooth on
∙ outgoing
∙ call three one nine oh two
∙ nine seven pause three oh eight
∙ cancel
∙ call back number
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
∙ call star two zero nine five
∙ delete phone
∙ dial eight three zero five one
∙ record name
∙ four three pause two nine pause zero
∙ delete redial number
∙ phonebook list names
∙ call eight oh five four one
∙ correction
∙ connect phone
∙ dial seven four oh one eight
∙ previous entry
∙ delete
∙ dial nine seven two six six
∙ call seven six three oh one
∙ go back
∙ call five six two eight zero
∙ dial six six four three seven
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the voice recognition system, it
is possible to select menu options by using
the steering wheel controls instead of
speaking voice commands. The manual
control mode does not allow dialing a
phone number by digits. The user may se-
lect an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recog-
nition, exit the manual control mode by
pressing and holding the
PHONE/END
button. At that time,
pressing the PHONE/SEND
button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
Operating tips
∙ To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt
the
tuning switch up or down. The
system will speak "Showing Manual Op-
tions" when manual controls are initially
activated.
∙ To browse the menu options, tilt
the
tuning switch up or down. The
system will always speak the current
menu option. Depending on the audio
display, it will also show the current
menu option.
∙ To select the current menu option,
press
button.
∙ To go back to the previous menu, press
the
button. If the current menu is
the Main Menu, pressing
the
button will exit the Phone sys-
tem.
∙ To exit the manual control mode, press
and hold the
button for 5 seconds.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If prob-
lems are encountered, try the following so-
lutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with num-
ber 1, until the problem is resolved.
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Symptom Solution
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this
section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be car-
ried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. For additional information, refer to “Voice
Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be
confirmed by using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this
section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
hicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone
connecting procedure is required. Your
phone is automatically connected with the
LHA4308
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
in-vehicle phone module when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position with the
previously connected cellular phone turned
on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® de-
vices; however some phones do not con-
nect automatically to the system. For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual.
You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before us-
ing the hands-free phone system.
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting in-
structions.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an under-
ground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
vent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other per-
son’s voice during a call.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the cellu-
lar phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ For additional information, please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
ent location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-
ing the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
tenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-
ized, which takes a few seconds. If the
/ button is pressed before the initial-
ization completes, the system will an-
nounce “Hands-free phone system not
ready” and will not react to voice com-
mands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-
vent the system from recognizing voice
commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press and release the
/ button
located on the steering wheel. After the
tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ If you need to hear the available com-
mands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by say-
ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-
nounces “Cancel” and ends the Voice
Recognition session. You can also press
and hold the
/ button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any
time to end the Voice Recognition ses-
sion. Whenever the Voice Recognition
session is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the volume con-
trol switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feed-
back. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
/ button on the
steering wheel. After interrupting the sys-
tem, wait for a beep before speaking your
command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
example, press the
/ button
and after the tone say, “Call Redial”.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.
/
PHONE/SEND
Press the
/ button
to initiate a Voice Recognition
session or answer an incom-
ing call.
Type A (if so equipped)
LHA2499
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
If the operation of “Siri” is set
to “Short Press” on the
Bluetooth® settings menu,
pressing and holding
the
/ button initi-
ates a Voice Recognition ses-
sion for the Hands-Free
Phone operation. For addi-
tional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.
You can also use
the
/ button to in-
terrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once.
For additional information,
refer to “Voice commands”
and “During a call” in this
section.
/
PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition
system is active, press and
hold the
/ button
for 5 seconds to quit the
Voice Recognition system at
any time.
Tuning switch (left side)
While using the Voice Recog-
nition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manu-
ally control the phone system.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
Type B (if so equipped)
LHA4309
LHA2775
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on
Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off
Add Phone Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and
complete the connection process.
Delete Phone Delete a phone currently connected to the system.
Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voice tags that were recorded
using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.
Select Phone Choose a phone from a list of previously connected or currently connected phones.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system,
press the
/ button on the steer-
ing wheel. The system will automatically
begin searching for a compatible phone. If
the system detects a compatible phone,
commands will display. Say “Add Phone”, a
message with a PIN appears on the screen.
Operate the Bluetooth® phone to com-
plete the connection process.
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Press the
/ button and say
“Phone” to bring up the phone command
menu. The available options are:
∙ Call
∙ Phonebook
∙ Recent Calls
∙ Messaging (if so equipped)
∙ Select Phone
“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.
“Phonebook”
The following commands are available un-
der “Phonebook”:
∙ (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring
up a list of options for that phonebook
entry. The system will say the name it
interpreted based on the voice com-
mand provided. If the name is incorrect,
say “Correction” to hear another name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is
identified, say “Dial” to dial the number
or “Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Record Name” to re-
cord a name for the phonebook entry.
Say “Delete Recording” to delete a re-
corded name for the phonebook entry.
∙ List Names
Speak this command to have the sys-
tem list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to
dial the number of the current name or
“Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previ-
ous Entry” to move through the list al-
phabetically. Say “Record Name” to re-
cord a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phone-
book entry.
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available un-
der “Recent Calls”:
∙ Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the incoming call will
be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next
Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of
missed calls.
∙ Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next
Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
∙ Redial
Speak this command to call the last
number dialed.
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the number
of the last incoming call to the vehicle.
“Messaging” (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text mes-
saging functions. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-
tion.
“Select Phone”
Speak this command to select a phone to
use from a list of those phones connected
to the vehicle.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to
the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System:
1. Press the
/ button on the
steering wheel.
2. Select “Call”.
3. Select one of the available commands
to continue:
∙ “List Names” — Select this command to
have the system list the names in the
phonebook one by one alphabetically.
Select “Dial” to dial the number of the
current name or “Send Text” to send a
text message to that number. Select
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list alphabetically.
∙ “Redial” – Select this command to dial
the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Redialing
<name/number>”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it is
available, otherwise, the number being
redialed will be displayed.
∙ “Call Back” – Select this command to dial
the number of the last incoming call.
The system will display “Calling back
<name/number>”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it is
available, otherwise the number being
called back will be displayed.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone con-
nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System, the call information is
displayed on the control panel display.
Press the
/ button to accept
the call. Press the
/ button to re-
ject the call.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the /
button to access additional options. Speak
one of the following commands:
∙ “Send” – Speak this command followed
by the digits to enter digits during the
phone call.
∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the
command to mute or unmute the sys-
tem.
∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To
transfer the call back from the handset
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, press the
/ button
and confirm when prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call
waiting functionality. If a call is received
while another call is already active, a mes-
sage will be displayed on the screen. Press
the
/ button to hold the active
call and switch to the second call. Press
the
/ button to reject the sec-
ond call.
While the second call is active, pressing
the
/ button will allow the same
commands that available during any call
as well as two additional commands:
∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to
hold the second call and switch back to
the original call.
∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command
to stay with the second call and end the
original call.
Press the
/ button to accept
the call. Press the
/ button to re-
ject the call.
ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press
the
/ button.
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”
Check local regulations before using
the feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of some of the applica-
tions and features, such as social net-
working and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Many phones may require special per-
mission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. Please consult
you phone’s Owner’s manual. Text mes-
sage integration requires that the phone
support MAP (Message Access Profile)
for both receiving and sending text mes-
sages. Some phones may not support all
text messaging features. For additional
information, please refer to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
ibility information, as well as your de-
vice’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and re-
ceiving of text messages through the ve-
hicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
/ button.
2. Say “Messaging”.
3. Say “Send Text”.
4. The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ (A name)
∙ Number
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
∙ Missed Calls
If “Incoming Calls”, “Outgoing Calls”, or
“Missed Calls” is selected, the following
additional commands will be dis-
played:
∙ Send Text
∙ Next Entry
∙ Previous Entry
For additional information about these
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Five predefined messages are avail-
able as well as three custom mes-
sages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Message”. If more than one cus-
tom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired cus-
tom message. For additional information
on setting and managing custom text
messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in
this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
/ button.
2. Say “Messaging”.
3. Say “Read Text”.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-
ing switch on the steering wheel to scroll
through all text messages if more than one
are available. Press the
button to exit
the text message screen. Press the
/ button to access the following op-
tions for replying to the text message:
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom mes-
sages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri®.
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button:
∙ Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off ” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
LHA2274
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.
∙ Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the dis-
played list. The system will ask to con-
firm before deleting the phone.
∙ Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the dis-
played list. When a selection is made,
the system will ask to confirm before
proceeding. The recorded phonebook
for the phone being deleted will be
saved as long as the new phone’s
phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
∙ Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously con-
nected phone from the displayed list.
∙ Show Incoming Calls
Incoming call information may be dis-
played on the center display screen.
∙ Siri
Select to adjust Siri® Eyes Free function
from “Short Press” to “Long Press”. For
additional information, refer to “Siri®
Eyes Free” in this section. “Siri” is dis-
played only when a Siri Eyes Free en-
abled iPhone® is connected to the ve-
hicle.
∙ Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic
download of a connected phone’s
phonebook.
∙ Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.
∙ New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the
sound that plays when a new text is
received by a phone connected to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
The setting all the way to the left indi-
cates that the new text sound will be
muted.
∙ Show Incoming Text
Incoming text messages may be dis-
played on the center display screen. Se-
lect “None” to have no display of incom-
ing text messages.
∙ Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that
will be available with the standard op-
tions when sending a text message. To
set a custom message, send a text
message to your own phone number
while the phone is connected to the
system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be
set while the vehicle is stationary.
∙ Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply
function. When enabled, the vehicle will
automatically send a predefined text
message to the sender when a text
message is received while driving.
∙ Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is
sent when the Auto Reply function is
enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or
one of the three custom messages
stored in the system.
∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the
vehicle signature is added to outgoing
text messages from the vehicle. This
message cannot be changed or cus-
tomized.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system,
it is possible to select menu options by
using the steering wheel controls instead
of speaking voice commands. To activate
manual control mode, press the
/ button on the steering wheel to ac-
cess the phone menu and then tilt
the
tuning switch either up or down.
The manual control mode does not allow
dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook
or Recent Calls lists. To reactivate Voice
Recognition, exit the manual control mode
by pressing and holding
the
/ button. At that time, press-
ing the
/ button will start the
Hands Free Phone System.
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
hicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected
with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition with the connected cellular phone
turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-
ports the phone commands, so dialing a
phone number using your voice is possible.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a cellular phone and the in-
vehicle phone module before using the
hands-free phone system.
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
LHA4355
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an under-
ground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
vent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other per-
son’s voice during a call.
∙ Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be im-
possible to receive a call for a short pe-
riod of time.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the cellu-
lar phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.
You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help if the hands-free phone
system seems to be malfunctioning.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
ent location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone owner’s manual regard-
ing the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
∙ The signal strength display on the
monitor will not coincide with the signal
strength display of some cellular
phones.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
tenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Bosch.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate
various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem features using the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the voice recognition system,
the system voice can be interrupted to al-
low the user to speak commands. While
the system is speaking, press
the
/ button on the steering
wheel. The system voice will stop and a
tone will be heard. After the tone, speak
desired command (displayed on the
touch-screen).
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
example, press the
/ button and
after the tone say, “Call Redial”.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
1. Press the [
] button on the control
panel.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
LHA3622
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
5. Initiate the connecting process from
the handset. The system will display
the message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed
on your Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is
displayed on your Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes” to complete the pairing
process.
For additional information, refer to the
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the
button on the control
panel.
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.
3. Choose the desired entry from the dis-
played list.
4. The number of the entry will be dis-
played on the screen. Touch the num-
ber to initiate dialing.
NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch
the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of
the screen. Turn the TUNE knob to
choose a letter or number and then
press ENTER. The list will move to the
first entry that begins with that number
or letter.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the control
panel. The “Phone” screen will appear
on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to
make a call:
∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from an
entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.
∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from the
incoming, outgoing or missed.
∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from
the vehicle.
∙“
”: Input the phone number manu-
ally using a keypad displayed on the
screen. For additional information, refer
to “How to use the touch-screen” in this
section.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is placed to the connected phone,
the display will change to phone mode.
To accept the incoming call, either:
∙ Press the
/ button on the
steering wheel, or
∙ Touch the phone
icon on the
screen.
To reject the incoming call, either:
∙ Press the
/ button on the
steering wheel, or
∙ Touch the phone
icon on the
screen.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options
are available on the screen:
∙ “Handset”
Select this option to switch control of
the phone call over to the handset.
∙ “Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the micro-
phone. Select again to unmute the mi-
crophone.
∙ Phone
icon
Select to end the phone call.
4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ENDING A CALL
To end a phone call, select the
phone
icon on the screen or press
the
/ button on the steering
wheel.
TEXT MESSAGING
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”
Check local regulations before using
the feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of some of the applica-
tions and features, such as social net-
working and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special per-
mission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to the phone’s Own-
er’s Manual.
Text message integration requires that
the phone support MAP (Message Ac-
cess Profile) for both receiving and send-
ing text messages. Some phones may
not support all text messaging features.
Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
ibility information, as well as your de-
vices’ Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and re-
ceiving of text messages through the ve-
hicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
/ button on the
steering wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ To (a name)
∙ Enter Number
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
For additional information, refer to
“Voice commands” in this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are avail-
able as well as three custom mes-
sages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”
∙ “When?”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the
system will prompt for the number of
the desired custom message. For ad-
ditional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
/ button on the
steering wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-
ing switch to scroll through all text mes-
sages if more than one are available. Press
the
/ button to exit the text
message screen. Press
the
/ button to access the fol-
lowing options for replying to the text mes-
sage:
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom mes-
sages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.
4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
Menu Item Result
Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Connect New Device Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select Connected Device Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Replace Connected Device Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Delete Connected Device Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Bluetooth Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.
LHA2844
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and ad-
just the following settings as desired:
∙ Start Siri® by:
Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set how Siri® is operated on the steering
wheel.
∙ Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are al-
phabetically displayed on the screen.
∙ Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s
phonebook. Select “SIM” to use the
phonebook on the SIM card. Touch
“Both” to use both sources.
∙ Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to
the vehicle from the chosen source.
∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phone-
book entry for use with the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.
∙ Phone Notifications for:
Notifications may be displayed on the
center display screen.
∙ Text Messaging:
Touch to toggle the text message func-
tionality on or off.
∙ Show Incoming Text for:
Text notifications may be displayed on
the center display screen. Touch “Off” to
turn off all text notifications.
∙ Auto Reply:
Touch to toggle the auto reply function-
ality on or off.
∙ Auto Reply Message:
Touch to indicate preferred message to
be sent when “Auto Reply” function is
activated.
∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature:
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of
the vehicle signature to outgoing mes-
sages.
∙ Custom Text Messages:
Touch this option to select a custom
message to edit. There are 4 customer
message slots available.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If prob-
lems are encountered, try the following so-
lutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with num-
ber 1, until the problem is resolved.
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Symptom Solution
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys-
tem” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system al-
lows hands-free operation of the systems
equipped on this vehicle, such as the
phone and navigation systems.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press the
/ button located on
the steering wheel. When prompted, speak
the command for the system you wish to
activate. The command given is picked up
by the microphone and performed when it
is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition will provide a voice response and a
message in the center display to inform
you of the command results.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When com-
pleted, the system is ready to accept voice
commands. If the
/ button is
pressed before the initialization completes,
the system will announce: “Voice Recogni-
tion System not ready. Please wait.”
Giving voice commands
1. Press the / button.
2. The system announces: “Please say a
category like phone or a command like
points of interest followed by a brand
name”. A list of available commands is
then spoken by the system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon
on the display changes, speak a com-
mand. Available commands are dis-
cussed in this section.
Type A (if so equipped)
LHA2522
Type B (if so equipped)
LHA4318
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. Voice and display feedback are pro-
vided when the command is accepted.
∙ If the command is not recognized, the
system announces: “Command not
recognized”. Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
∙ If you want to cancel the command or
go back to the previous menu of com-
mands, press the
/ button.
The system will announce: “Canceling
voice recognition” or “Go back” depend-
ing on the current menu level.
∙ Press the BACK button on the control
panel to move back through the menus
displayed on the screen.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, use the volume control
switches on the steering wheel or the
volume knob on the control panel.
∙ The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel dis-
play:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recogniz-
ing the voice commands correctly.
∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speak-
ing a command. Otherwise, the com-
mand will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the
following systems:
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
∙ Navigation
∙ Audio
∙ Information
∙ My Apps
∙ Help
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
LHA2780
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-
tain way to speak numbers in voice com-
mands. Refer to the following examples.
General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be
used for “0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the
following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say
dial number and then speak the phone
number in any of the following formats:
∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six two
oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dial-
ing results, say phone numbers as single
digits. Also, full numbers can only be spo-
ken for “800”. For example, you cannot say
555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System voice commands:
1. Press the
/ button.
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the ve-
hicle phonebook to call that entry. Oth-
erwise, say “Phone” to access various
phone commands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off.
Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and
the vehicle is stationary, the system an-
nounces: “There is no phone connected.
Would you like to connect a phone now?”
Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.
If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is
set to “On”, the following voice commands
are available:
∙ Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in
which you are trying to call. System will
confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to
initiate dialing.
∙ Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.
After the number is entered, say “Dial”
to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to
correct the number entered. Say “Go
Back” to return to the main menu.
∙ List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical en-
try in the vehicle phonebook, the sys-
tem prompts for an additional com-
mand. Say “Dial” to call the number of
the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text”
to send a text message to the number
of the phonebook entry. Say “Next En-
try” to skip to the next alphabetical en-
try in the vehicle phonebook, where
the same options will then be available.
4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional
command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incom-
ing Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display
a list of such calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry dis-
played on the screen to dial that num-
ber or say “Next Page” to view entries
on the next page (if available).
∙ Redial
Redials the last called number.
∙ Read Text
Reads an incoming text message. For
additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
∙ Send Text
Sends a text message. For additional
information, refer to “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System with Navi-
gation System” in this section.
∙ Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual
controls to continue”. Use manual con-
trols to change the active phone from
among the listed phones connected
to the vehicle.
∙ Siri® (if so equipped)
For additional information about the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with Navigation System” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
The following voice commands are avail-
able for the navigation system:
∙ Street Address (address)
∙ Points of Interest (name)
∙ POI by Category
∙ Home
∙ Address Book
∙ Previous Destinations
∙ Enter Address in Steps
∙ Cancel Route
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
To access the audio system voice com-
mands:
1. Press the
/ button.
2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following
available commands:
∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band
∙ Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
AM frequency
∙ Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
FM frequency
∙ SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
∙ CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
∙ Play Song (name)
Allows user to select song name to be
played
∙ Play Artist (name)
Allows user to select artist to be played
∙ Play Album (name)
Allows user to select album name to
be played
For additional information, refer to “Audio
system” in this section.
INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are avail-
able for the information functions of the
navigation system:
∙ Traffic
∙ Fuel Prices
∙ Stocks
∙ Movie Listings
∙ Current Weather
∙ Weather Map
∙ 5—dayForecast
∙ 6 — hour Forecast
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this
voice command. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile Apps”
in this section.
HELP VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands can be
spoken to have the system provide in-
structions and tips for using the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.
∙ List Commands
∙ What Can I Say?
∙ General Help
∙ Quit
∙ Exit
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If prob-
lems are encountered, follow the solutions
given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with num-
ber one, until the problem is resolved.
4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Symptom/error message Solution
The system responds “Command
Not Recognized” or the system fails
to recognize the command
correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”
menu.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2
Three-way catalyst ...........................5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (if so equipped)........................5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-6
Off-roadrecovery ............................5-7
Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-7
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-8
Ignition switch (if so equipped)...................5-8
Continuously Variable Transmission
(if so equipped) ...............................5-9
Manual transmission (if so equipped) .........5-9
Ignition switch positions.....................5-10
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
(if so equipped) ..............................5-10
Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) ....5-10
Operating range..............................5-11
Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-12
Emergency engine shut off ..................5-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge ...................................5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-14
Before starting the engine......................5-14
Starting the engine .............................5-14
Driving the vehicle ..............................5-15
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped) ........................5-15
Manual transmission (if so equipped) ........5-20
Parking brake ..................................5-21
Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-22
Precautions on cruise control................5-23
Cruise control operations....................5-23
Break-in schedule ..............................5-24
Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-25
Increasing fuel economy .......................5-26
Parking/parking on hills ........................5-27
Power steering .................................5-28
Brake system...................................5-29
Brake precautions ...........................5-29
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-29
Brake assist .................................5-30
V
ehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-31
Brake force distribution......................5-33
Cold weather driving ...........................5-34
Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-34
Antifreeze ...................................5-34
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
gerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the ve-
hicle inspected immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-
gine running for any extended length
of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, doors
and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed
while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the pas-
senger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Turn the air recirculation mode off
and set the fan speed control to
the highest level to circulate the
air.
∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission con-
trol device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.
WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-
mals or flammable materials away
from the exhaust system
components.
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause over rich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if no-
ticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are de-
tected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
ing the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illu-
minated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-
tion indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Starting and driving 5-3
Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-
sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-
ing).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted for all four tires. Af-
ter the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn
off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure.
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warn-
ing message is displayed in the odom-
eter when the low tire pressure warning
light is illuminated and low tire pressure
is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warn-
ing message turns off when the low tire
pressure warning light turns off.
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning mes-
sage is not displayed if the low tire pres-
sure warning light illuminates to indi-
cate a TPMS malfunction.
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-
eration and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illumi-
nates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently dam-
age the tires and increase the likeli-
hood of tire failure. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to
an accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pressure
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure
to the recommended COLD tire pres-
sure shown on the Tire and Loading In-
formation label, located on the driver’s
door opening, to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. (For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.)
5-4 Starting and driving
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning
light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-
dows. This may cause poor reception of
the signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the TPMS will not function
properly.
Some devices and transmitters may tem-
porarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙
Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-
cies is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
Starting and driving 5-5
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides
visual and audible signals outside the ve-
hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-
ommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition. Do not start the engine.
Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-
tors will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙
If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash
three times. To correct the pressure,
push the core of the valve stem on the
tire briefly to release pressure. When
the pressure reaches the designated
pressure, the horn beeps once.
∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds af-
ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-
cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is
not operating.
∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-
Fill Tire Alert under the following con-
ditions:
– If there is interference from an exter-
nal device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation
device is not sufficient to inflate the
tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sen-
sor is low.
∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-
erate due to TPMS interference, move
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
tire pressure gauge.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the in-
fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
5-6 Starting and driving
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
tem” section of this manual, and also in-
struct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure be-
low. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires re-
turn to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the ve-
hicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-
turn the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic con-
ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-
dling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The ve-
hicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-
sure. Losing control of the vehicle may
cause a collision and result in personal
injury.
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
Starting and driving 5-7
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-
ally stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alco-
hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an acci-
dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-
tionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-
ever, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
collisions. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-
ferently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.
WARNING
∙ Never remove the ignition key or place
the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion while driving. The steering wheel
will lock. This may cause the driver to
lose control of the vehicle and could
result in serious vehicle damage or
personal injury.
IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)
5-8 Starting and driving
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position until the shift lever is moved
to the P (Park) position.
∙ When placing the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, make sure that the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
∙ When removing the key from the igni-
tion switch (if it is inserted), make sure
that the shift lever is in the P (Park) po-
sition.
When the ignition switch cannot be placed
in the LOCK position:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
2. Move the ignition switch slightly in the
ON direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the
ignition switch.
If the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position.
The shift lever can be moved if the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position
䊊
1
between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF posi-
tion is indicated by a “1” on the key cylin-
der.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that
helps prevent accidental removal of the
key while driving.
The key can only be removed when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked,
it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock-
wise from the straight up position.
SSD0392 WSD0052
Starting and driving 5-9
To lock the steering wheel, place the ig-
nition switch in the LOCK position. Re-
move the key. To unlock the steering
wheel, insert the key and turn it gently
while rotating the steering wheel slightly
right and left.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)
The engine can be turned off without lock-
ing the steering wheel.
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accesso-
ries such as the radio when the engine is
not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the key. It
automatically returns to the ON position.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button igni-
tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-
cept in an emergency. (The engine will
stop when the ignition switch is pushed
three consecutive times in quick suc-
cession or the ignition switch is pushed
and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
engine stops while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and
serious injury.
LSD2014
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if
so equipped)
5-10 Starting and driving
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal or the clutch
pedal for manual transmission models
(M/T), the ignition switch position will illumi-
nate as follows:
Push center:
∙ Once to change to ACC.
∙ Two times to change to ON.
∙ Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically re-
turn to the LOCK position when any door is
either opened or closed with the switch in
the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch position cannot be
switched to OFF until the shift lever is
moved to the P (Park) position or N (Neutral)
position (M/T).
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the OFF position, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion or N (Neutral) position (M/T).
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot
be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for opera-
tion are displayed in the meter. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are pres-
ent near the operating location, the Intelli-
gent Key system’s operating range be-
comes narrower and may not function
properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even some-
one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to
turn the ignition switch to start the engine.
WSD0165
Starting and driving 5-11
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle
䊊
1
.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, in-
side the glove box, storage bin or door
pocket, the Intelligent Key may not
function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is pushed to the ACC position while carry-
ing the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent
Key inserted in the port.
The ignition switch will lock when any door
is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on
the ignition switch.
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accesso-
ries, such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will
turn the ignition switch to the OFF position
after 30 minutes under the following con-
ditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will turn
the ignition switch to the OFF position, if the
vehicle is not running, after some time un-
der the following conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-
tion switch in ACC or ON positions when
the engine is not running for an ex-
tended period. This can discharge the
battery.
5-12 Starting and driving
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged, or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
procedure:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the
NISSAN Intelligent Key® as illustrated. (A
chime will sound.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depress-
ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the
brake pedal, the ignition switch position will
change to ACC.
NOTE:
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position or the engine
is started by the above procedures,
the NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning
light may blink in yellow (on the me-
ter) even if the NISSAN Intelligent
Key® is inside the vehicle. This is not a
malfunction. To stop the warning
light from blinking, touch the ignition
switch with the NISSAN Intelligent
Key® again.
∙ If the NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning
light in the meter is blinking in green,
replace the battery as soon as pos-
sible. For additional information, re-
fer to “Battery replacement” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
SSD0860
Starting and driving 5-13
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so
equipped), and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-
ance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
∙ Lock all doors.
∙ Position seat and adjust head
restraints/headrests.
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-
gers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this
manual.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
model
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position or if the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
The starter is designed not to oper-
ate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
Manual transmission model
Depress the clutch pedal to the floor,
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position, and crank the engine.
The starter is designed not to oper-
ate unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
5-14 Starting and driving
3. Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by placing the
ignition switch in the START position.
Release the switch when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when re-
starting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and hold it and then crank the
engine. Release the switch and the
accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-
cause it is flooded, depress the accel-
erator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Crank the engine for
5-6 seconds. After cranking the en-
gine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by placing the
ignition switch in the START position.
Release the key when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, place the ignition switch
in the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need
to be charged to maintain battery
health.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
versing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Starting and driving 5-15
CAUTION
∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause se-
rious damage to the transmission.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the fol-
lowing pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driv-
ing enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
versing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause se-
rious damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
start the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before
moving the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
5-16 Starting and driving
The Continuously Variable Transmission
is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST
be depressed before shifting from P
(Park) to any drive position while the ig-
nition switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear po-
sitions if the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
keyisremoved.
To move the shift lever:
Press the button
䊊
A
while depressing
the brake pedal
Press the button
䊊
A
to shift
Shift without pressing the button
䊊
A
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever from P
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal in-
jury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
ACC position for any reason while the ve-
hicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position,
the key cannot be turned to the LOCK po-
sition and be removed from the ignition
switch. If this occurs, perform the following
steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the ve-
hicle is stopped.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) to park
the vehicle and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK position to remove
the key.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the ve-
hicle is completely stopped.
LSD2013
Starting and driving 5-17
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then place
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. R (Reverse) speed is limited to
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h) in the R (Reverse) position. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the
shift lever button pressed in to move the
shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or
any drive position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-
gaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
L(Low)
Use this position for maximum engine
braking on steep downhill
gradients/climbing steep slopes and
whenever approaching sharp bends. Do
not use the L (Low) position in any other
circumstances.
Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift lever
may not be moved from the P (Park) posi-
tion even with the foot brake pedal de-
pressed.
To move the shift lever, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a
3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift
lock release cover.
LSD2194
5-18 Starting and driving
∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also
be used.
4. Push down the shift lock release using
a suitable tool.
5. Press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
while holding down the shift lock re-
lease.
6. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition to unlock the steering wheel.
7. Release the parking brake.
The vehicle may be moved to the desired
location.
Replace the removed shift lock release
cover after the operation.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the
P (Park) position, have the Continuously
Variable Transmission system checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch (if so
equipped)
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with
the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,
the
light in the instrument panel illu-
minates. For additional information, refer
to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “In-
struments and controls” section of this
manual.
Use the overdrive OFF mode when you
need improved engine braking.
To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push
the O/D OFF switch again. The
indi-
cator light will turn off.
Each time the engine is started, or when
the shift lever is shifted to any position
other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF
mode will be automatically turned off.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
Continuously Variable Transmission will
not be shifted into the selected driving po-
sition.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual. This will oc-
cur even if all electrical circuits are func-
tioning properly. In this case, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and
LSD2012
Starting and driving 5-19
wait for 10 seconds. Then place the igni-
tion switch back in the ON position. The
vehicle should return to its normal oper-
ating condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have the
transmission checked and repaired, if
necessary. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-
curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-
duced.The reduced speed may be lower
than other traffic, which could increase
the chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary, pull
to the side of the road at a safe place
and allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have it repaired if
necessary.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.
CAUTION
∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This may cause
clutch damage.
∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
∙ Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or
downshifting, depress the clutch pedal
fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then
release the clutch slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully de-
press the clutch pedal before operating the
shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed before the transmission is
shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-
mission damage could occur.
Start the vehicle in the 1 (1st) position and shift
to the 2 (2nd), 3 (3rd), 4 (4th) and 5 (5th) gear in
sequence according to the vehicle speed.
LSD0128
5-20 Starting and driving
You cannot shift directly from 5th gear into
R (Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then
into R (Reverse).
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the
clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re-
verse) or 1 (1st).
Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle
speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy
and vehicle performance. Actual upshift
speeds will vary according to road condi-
tions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
For normal acceleration in low altitude ar-
eas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 9 (14)
2nd to 3rd 12 (19)
3rd to 4th 21 (34)
4th to 5th 28 (45)
5th —
For quick acceleration in low altitude areas
and high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
Gear change mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
5th —
Suggested maximum speed in
each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested
speed (shown below) in any gear. For level
road driving, use the highest gear suggested
for that speed. Always observe posted
speed limits, and drive according to the road
conditions, which will ensure safe operation.
Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to
a lower gear as it may cause engine damage
or loss of vehicle control.
GEAR mph (km/h)
1st 29 (47)
2nd 53 (85)
3rd 78 (125)
4th —
5th —
WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
PARKING BRAKE
Starting and driving 5-21
To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up
䊊
A
.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
Continuously Variable Transmission
models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
sition.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
lever slightly, press the button
䊊
B
and
lower the lever completely.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-
ing light goes out.
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
WSD0169
Type A (if so equipped)
LSD2430
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
5-22 Starting and driving
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-
tions, it cancels automatically.
∙ To properly set the cruise control sys-
tem, use the following procedures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driv-
ing under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
∙ On winding or hilly roads.
∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
∙ In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depress-
ing the clutch pedal when the cruise
control is set. Should this occur, depress
the clutch pedal and turn the ON/OFF
switch off immediately. Failure to do so
may cause engine damage.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-
out keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light
in the instrument panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET
indicator light in the instrument panel
comes on. Take your foot off the accelera-
tor pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-
ously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
Type B (if so equipped)
WSD0231
Starting and driving 5-23
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument panel
goes out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indica-
tor light goes out.
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument panel
goes out.
The cruise control is automatically can-
celed and the CRUISE light in the instru-
ment panel goes out if:
∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal
while pushing the ACCEL/RES or
SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is
deleted from memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You depress the clutch pedal (manual
transmission), or move the shift lever to
N (Neutral) (Continuously Variable
Transmission).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST/SET switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
∙
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may re-
sult in shortened engine life and re-
duced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-
stant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-
sible.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
5-24 Starting and driving
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while com-
muting and coast whenever pos-
sible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your num-
ber of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-
mize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.
∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-
tances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-
ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces un-
necessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll
Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruis-
ing speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Starting and driving 5-25
9. Winter Warm Up
∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil be-
fore driving.
∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-
ating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever pos-
sible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C sys-
tem.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tions” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
5-26 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models or in an appropriate
gear for manual transmission (M/T)
models. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or
roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the shift lever has been
pushed as far forward as it can go and
cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. M/T models
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill
grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.
CVT models
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
SSD0488
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Starting and driving 5-27
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
䊊
1
:
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB
䊊
2
:
Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB
䊊
3
:
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to oper-
ate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated re-
peatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power as-
sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is re-
duced, steering wheel operation will be-
come heavy. When the temperature of the
power steering system goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-
erations that could cause the power steer-
ing system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering
wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servic-
ing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
POWER STEERING
5-28 Starting and driving
The brake system has two separate hy-
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-
sure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-
celerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-
ing will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be lon-
ger and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the brake shoes
and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order
to assure the best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain ve-
hicle control during braking on slip-
pery surfaces. Remember that stop-
ping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal sur-
faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also af-
fect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Starting and driving 5-29
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-
cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the self-
test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a mal-
function. If the computer senses a mal-
function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally but without anti-lock
assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-
ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-
10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-
sure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-
tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-
erating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are haz-
ardous and extra care is required while
driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.
5-30 Starting and driving
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a non-
slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control func-
tion).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-
low the steered path despite in-
creased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-
not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-
ing situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes to
note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indi-
cates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip in-
dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the
indicator light comes on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system auto-
matically turns off when the indicator light
is on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system. The
indicator illumi-
nates to indicate the VDC system is off.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
Starting and driving 5-31
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
the system, the VDC system still operates
to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
wheel. The
indicator flashes if this oc-
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
the
indicator will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to
ON when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-
ture that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle for-
ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-
tion of a malfunction.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
ways drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
the
and indicator lights
may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, both the
and the indicator lights may
illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illumi-
nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-
start the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
5-32 Starting and driving
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the four wheels depending
on the radius of the turn.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
ways drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
the
and indicator lights
may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, both the
and the indicator lights may
illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illumi-
nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-
start the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
Starting and driving 5-33
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before in-
serting it into the key hole, or use the re-
mote keyless entry key fob or the NISSAN
Intelligent Key®.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper win-
ter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-
cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-
ating the vehicle. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially re-
duced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian prov-
inces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before install-
ing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-
drifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
5-34 Starting and driving
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” un-
der these conditions. Try to avoid driv-
ing on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist
with cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)
or lower.
WARNING
∙ Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be
seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-
sion cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least2-4hours, de-
pending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-35
MEMO
5-36 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2
Emergency engine shut off
(Push-button ignition models only) ..............6-2
Flat tire ..........................................6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (if so equipped)........................6-3
Changing a flat tire ...........................6-3
Jump starting ..................................6-12
Push starting ...................................6-14
If your vehicle overheats ........................6-14
Towing your vehicle ............................6-15
Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-15
Vehicle recovery
(freeing a stuck vehicle)......................6-17
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emer-
gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-
ers while moving on the highway un-
less unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle
might become a hazard to other
traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
(Push-button ignition models only)
6-2 In case of emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light is
lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)
warning message is displayed in the
odometer, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is be-
ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS
will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-
tional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section, and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
ing with under-inflated tires may per-
manently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS
such as the spare tire, TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-
placed and/or TPMS system reset as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
these services.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Shift the manual trans-
mission into R (Reverse) or the Continu-
ously Variable Transmission into P
(Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assis-
tance personnel that you need assis-
tance.
FLAT TIRE
In case of emergency 6-3
6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-
hicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-
curely applied and the manual trans-
mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or
the Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion into P (Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-
fessional road assistance.
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
Getting the spare tire and tools
Open the rear hatch. Remove the Divide-N-
Hide® floor (if so equipped). For additional
information, refer to “Divide-N-Hide® ad-
justable floor” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual.
Lift the floorboard.
LCE2142 LCE2083
6-4 In case of emergency
1. Remove the jacking tools from the stor-
age location.
2. Loosen the bolt
䊊
1
counterclockwise
to lower the spare.
3. Stop turning the bolt when the spare is
lowered to the point where the tire bas-
ket
䊊
2
can be removed from the hook
䊊
3
.
4. Remove the wheel basket by pushing
the basket upward.
5. Lower the tire basket to the ground
and take out the spare.
LCE2088
LCE2102
In case of emergency 6-5
Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
䊊
1
as illustrated.
Apply cloth
䊊
2
between the wheel and jack
rod to prevent damaging the wheel and
wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.
Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire change.
SCE0630 WCE0131
6-6 In case of emergency
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the ve-
hicle to move.
Always refer to the illustrations for the cor-
rect placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following in-
structions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head be-
tween the 2 notches in the front or the
rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the
jack head between the notches as
shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.
SCE0002
In case of emergency 6-7
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
) until
they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illus-
trated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
). Lower the vehicle
completely.
WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD pres-
sure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label af-
fixed to the driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking
equipment in the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can be-
come dangerous projectiles in an ac-
cident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual
WCE0048
6-8 In case of emergency
Reinstalling the temporary spare
tire to its original position
After the flat tire is repaired, return the tem-
porary spare to its original position in the
tire basket under the rear of the vehicle.
1. Open the hatch.
2. Remove the luggage floor.
3. Loosen bolt
䊊
1
counterclockwise ap-
proximately 20 turns using the wheel
nut wrench and wrench extension to
lower the tire basket.
4. Stop turning the bolt when the tire bas-
ket is lowered to a place where it can be
removed from the hook. Do not loosen
the bolt excessively, otherwise the
basket may fall suddenly.
5. Hold the tire basket and remove it from
the hook by pushing the basket
䊊
2
up-
ward and moving the hook
䊊
3
to re-
lease the basket.
LCE2096 LCE2097
In case of emergency 6-9
6. Lower the tire basket slowly to the
ground and then put in the temporary
spare tire
䊊
4
.
7. Reinstall the tire basket by pushing up-
ward on the basket
䊊
5
and inserting the
hook
䊊
6
.
Be sure that the hook is located as
shown in the image
䊊
7
. The hook must
engage from the inside of the basket.
LCE2098 LCE2099 LCE2100
6-10 In case of emergency
8. Tighten the bolt
䊊
8
clockwise until the
bolt is tight using the wheel nut wrench
and wrench extension to move the tire
basket up to the holding position.
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire,
tire basket and jacking equipment are
properly secured after use. Such
items can become dangerous projec-
tiles in an accident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
∙ When reinstalling the spare tire bas-
ket under the vehicle after use, be
sure that the hook engages the bas-
ket from the inside. If the spare tire
basket hook is not engaged properly,
there is an increased risk of the spare
tire separating from the vehicle in a
crash and causing injury.
Stowing the damaged tire
Return the spare tire basket back to its
original position in the reverse order of re-
moval. For additional information, refer to
“Getting the spare tire and tools” in this sec-
tion.
Spare tire basket bolt tightening torque:
56 ft–lb (75 N•m)
Securely store the jack and tools in the
storage area.
Securely store the damaged tire in the
cargo area as illustrated.
LCE2101 LCE2103
In case of emergency 6-11
NOTE:
The spare tire basket cannot be used to
store the conventional tire.
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after each use. Such items
can become dangerous projectiles in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Make sure that the spare tire basket is
properly secured in its original posi-
tion after removing the spare tire.
∙ The spare tire and small size spare tire
are designed for emergency use. For
additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.
WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with any-
thing, immediately flush the con-
tacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-
tery, always wear suitable eye protec-
tors (for example, goggles or indus-
trial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jew-
elry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
JUMP STARTING
6-12 In case of emergency
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause per-
sonal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another ve-
hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the 2 vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmis-
sion) or to P (Park) (Continuously Vari-
able Transmission). Switch off all un-
necessary electrical systems (lights,
heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an
old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
).
CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-
tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start
the engine of the vehicle being jump
started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, turn the key
off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying
again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-
connect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).
Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to
cover the vent holes as it may be con-
taminated with corrosive acid.
WCE0054
In case of emergency 6-13
CAUTION
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
3-way catalyst may be damaged.
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) and manual transmission mod-
els cannot be push-started or tow-
started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
∙ For manual transmission models,
never try to start the vehicle by tow-
ing it. When the engine starts, the for-
ward surge could cause the vehicle to
collide with the tow vehicle.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a
red high temperature warning light
or
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading) or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps.
WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause en-
gine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while
the engine is still hot. When the radia-
tor cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-
ply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual trans-
mission) or to P (Park) (continuously
variable transmission).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air condi-
tioner temperature control to maxi-
mum hot and fan control to high
speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine.) Do not open the hood fur-
ther until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If cool-
ant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
6-14 In case of emergency
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-
ing fan can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant res-
ervoir tank with the engine running.
Add coolant to the engine coolant res-
ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-
hicle repaired. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-
cial in Canada) and local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing
equipment could damage your vehicle.
Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are
generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure
proper towing and to prevent accidental
damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-
mends having a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following pre-
cautions:
WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condi-
tion. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing” in the “Technical and Consumer In-
formation” section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-
tional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
In case of emergency 6-15
2WD models with Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
∙ Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels
on the ground (forward or backward),
as this may cause serious and expen-
sive damage to the transmission. If it
is necessary to tow the vehicle with
the rear wheels raised always use
towing dollies under the front wheels.
∙ When towing CVT models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on tow-
ing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by plac-
ing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).
LCE2356
6-16 In case of emergency
2WD models with manual
transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illus-
trated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put
the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
Your vehicle speed should never exceed
60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve-
hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle
the engine with the transmission in N (Neu-
tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-
gine after every 500 miles of towing may
cause damage to the transmission’s inter-
nal parts.
CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ If you have to tow manual transmis-
sion models with the rear wheels on
the ground (if you do not use towing
dollies) or four wheels on the ground:
– Always release the parking brake.
– Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position
– Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles
(805 km)
When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission.For additional
information, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
LCE2357
In case of emergency 6-17
∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-
tached only to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the ve-
hicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device de-
signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) System.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-
verse) and D (Drive) (continuously
variable transmission models) or 1st
(Low) and R (Reverse) (manual trans-
mission models).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
sible to maintain the rocking motion.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (continuously variable trans-
mission models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (manual transmission
models).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.
6-18 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ................................7-2
Washing......................................7-2
Waxing .......................................7-2
Removing spots ..............................7-3
Underbody ...................................7-3
Glass ......................................... 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3
Chromeparts................................7-3
Tire dressings ................................7-3
Cleaning interior.................................7-4
Air fresheners ................................7-5
Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-5
Seatbelts....................................7-6
Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion..............................7-7
Protect your vehicle from corrosion .......... 7-7
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-
age from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-
face.
Whenever possible, store or park your ve-
hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-
face when putting on or removing the
body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-
ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, es-
pecially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical de-
tergents, gasoline or solvents.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.
∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-
fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-
ered appearance before re-applying wax.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to assist you in choosing the proper
product.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions sup-
plied with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-
sives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive pol-
ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-
ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid last-
ing damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regu-
larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspen-
sion. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-
mal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the win-
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-
age the electrical conductors, radio an-
tenna elements or rear window de-
froster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-
cially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-
ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-
plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-
ing and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
Appearance and care 7-3
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-
cult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufac-
turer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifi-
cation sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and re-
sult in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather surfaces
and should be removed promptly. Do
not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-
ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia-based clean-
ers as they may damage the leather’s
natural finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precau-
tions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that al-
lows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufactur-
er’s instructions before using the air fresh-
eners.
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
other floor mat in the driver front po-
sition or install them upside down or
backwards.
∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-
cifically designed for use in your ve-
hicle model and model year.
∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat position-
ing hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-
terfere with pedal operation.
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular clean-
ing and replaced if they become exces-
sively worn.
LAI2098
Appearance and care 7-5
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-
sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu-
ously Variable Transmission models) or
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and
with the parking break fully applied, po-
sition the floor mat in the floorwell so
that the floor mat grommet holes are
aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-
fere with pedal operation. With the igni-
tion still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position (Continu-
ously Variable Transmission models) or
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and
with the parking break applied, fully ap-
ply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal opera-
tion or prevent the pedal from return-
ing to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-
pletely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
Positioning hooks
LAI2097
7-6 Appearance and care
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
∙ The accumulation of moisture-
retaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those ar-
eas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-
tion of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumula-
tion.
∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.
CORROSION PROTECTION
Appearance and care 7-7
CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic com-
ponents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions .......................8-2
Engine compartment check locations ...........8-3
Engine cooling system ..........................8-4
Checking engine coolant level ................8-5
Changing engine coolant.....................8-5
Engine oil........................................8-6
Checking engine oil level .....................8-6
Changing engine oil ..........................8-7
Changing engine oil filter .....................8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid (if so equipped) .............................8-9
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...........8-9
Brake fluid ...................................8-10
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..................8-10
Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-10
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-10
Battery..........................................8-11
Jump starting ...............................8-13
Variable voltage control system ................8-13
Drive belt .......................................8-14
Spark plugs ....................................8-15
Replacing spark plugs .......................8-15
Air cleaner......................................8-15
Windshield wiper blades ........................8-16
Cleaning ....................................8-16
Replacing ...................................8-16
Brakes..........................................8-18
Fuses...........................................8-18
Engine compartment .......................8-19
Passenger compartment....................8-19
Battery replacement ...........................8-21
Key fob (if so equipped) ......................8-21
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ......8-23
Lights ..........................................8-24
Headlights...................................8-24
Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-25
Exterior and interior lights ...................8-26
Wheels and tires................................8-29
Tire pressure ................................8-29
Tir
e labeling .................................8-32
Types of tires ................................8-35
Tire chains ..................................8-36
Changing wheels and tires ..................8-37
When performing any inspection or main-
tenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-
lowing are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the ve-
hicle from moving. For manual trans-
mission models, move the shift lever
to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move
the shift lever to P (Park).
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when perform-
ing any parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jew-
elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-
fore working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
∙ If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙
Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-
gine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even
if the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before work-
ing near the fan.
CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
∙
Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-
mission related component harness
connector disconnected while the ig-
nition switch is in the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-
tery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-
tions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
8-2 Do-it-yourself
HR16DE engine
1. Drive belt location
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Air cleaner
4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir
5. Fusible link
6. Battery
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI3055
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Do-it-yourself 8-3
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution con-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-
tional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.
WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional informa-
tion on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system addi-
tives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, trans-
mission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-
diluted to provide antifreeze protec-
tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your ve-
hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-
trate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
low the coolant manufacturer’s in-
structions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.
∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. For additional information, refer
to the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
8-4 Do-it-yourself
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level
䊊
2
, add coolant
to the MAX level
䊊
1
. If the reservoir is empty,
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-
cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
level
䊊
1
.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-
ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-
nance and schedules" section of this
manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-
gine compartment check locations” in this
section.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine over-
heating.
WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid es-
caping from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-
erly. Check your local regulations.
LDI3133
Do-it-yourself 8-5
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks
䊊
B
. This is the
normal operating oil level range. If the
oil level is below the L (Low) mark
䊊
A
,
remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-
ommended oil through the opening.
Do not overfill
䊊
C
.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some engine oil be-
tween oil maintenance intervals depend-
ing on the severity of operating conditions
or depending on the property of the en-
gine oil used. More engine oil is consumed
by frequent acceleration/deceleration es-
pecially when the engine rpm is high. Con-
sumption is likely to be higher when the
engine is new. If the rate of oil consump-
tion, after driving for 3,000 miles
(5,000 km), is more than 0.5 liter per
600 miles (1,000 km), it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the en-
gine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
LDI2687 LDI2795
ENGINE OIL
8-6 Do-it-yourself
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap
䊊
A
by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug
䊊
B
.
5. Remove the drain plug
䊊
B
with a
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.
WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The
engine oil may be hot.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug
䊊
B
and a new washer. Securely tighten the
drain plug
䊊
B
with a wrench. Do not use
excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap
䊊
A
securely.
For additional information on drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
ties” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to deter-
mine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.
LDI2788
Do-it-yourself 8-7
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug
䊊
B
and oil filter.
Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
filter
䊊
B
.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-
gine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-
rial remaining on the sealing surface of
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil .
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-
tance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
13 ft-lb (18 N·m)
LDI2789
8-8 Do-it-yourself
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-
gine oil by removing the oil filler cap
䊊
A
if necessary.
CAUTION
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-
age the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recom-
mended is not covered under
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as rec-
ommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid
is required, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
For additional information on brake fluid
specification, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and
clutch (if so equipped) systems. The
use of improper fluids can damage
the brake and clutch system and af-
fect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so
equipped)
BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
Do-it-yourself 8-9
BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If
the fluid level is below the MIN line
䊊
B
, or the
brake warning light comes on, add Genu-
ine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
fluid up to the MAX line
䊊
A
. If fluid must be
added frequently, the system should be
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The
brake fluid reservoir is shared with the
clutch hydraulic system for manual trans-
missions. If the level is below the MIN line
䊊
B
,
or the brake warning light comes on, add
Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent
DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line
䊊
A
. If fluid
must be added frequently, the system
should be checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped) comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
LDI2790 LDI2790 LDI2791
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
8-10 Do-it-yourself
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-
ture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer solu-
tion. This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer res-
ervoir with washer fluid concentrates
at full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the windshield-washer
reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s rec-
ommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer res-
ervoir. Do not use the windshield-
washer reservoir to mix the washer
fluid concentrate and water.
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of bak-
ing soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-
tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
BATTERY
Do-it-yourself 8-11
WARNING
∙ Do not expose the battery to electrical
sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explo-
sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-
ness or injury. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or severe burns. After
touching a battery or battery cap, do
not touch or rub your eyes. Thor-
oughly wash your hands. If the acid
contacts your eyes, skin or clothing,
immediately flush with water for at
least 15 minutes and seek medical
attention.
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
1. Remove the battery vent caps with a
screwdriver as shown.
WDI0701
8-12 Do-it-yourself
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only dis-
tilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill.
3. Reinstall the battery vent caps.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-
tion of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system. This system mea-
sures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage gen-
erated by the generator.
WDI0529
LDI2250
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
Do-it-yourself 8-13
The current sensor
䊊
A
is located near the
battery along the negative battery cable. If
you add electrical accessories to your ve-
hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable
body ground such as the frame or engine
block area.
1. Water pump pulley
2. Generator pulley
3. Manual tensioner pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
5. Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF or LOCK position before servic-
ing drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-
usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is
in poor condition, have it replaced or
adjusted. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition.
LDI2399
DRIVE BELT
8-14 Do-it-yourself
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace platinum-
tipped
䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-
ules" section of this manual. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner filter off can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner filter
not only cleans the intake air, it also
stops the flame if the engine back-
fires. If the air cleaner is not installed
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Never drive with the air
cleaner filter off. Be cautious working
on the engine when the air cleaner is
off.
SDI1895 LDI2708
SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER
Do-it-yourself 8-15
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
release the retaining clips
䊊
A
, then release
the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the
unit upward
䊊
B
.
The viscous paper type filter element
should not be cleaned and reused. Replace
the air filter according to the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-
ules” section of this manual.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other mate-
rial may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer fluid or a mild detergent.Your wind-
shield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter-
gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa-
ter. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper,
install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield.
2. Push and hold the release tab
䊊
A
, and
then move the wiper blade down
䊊
B
the wiper arm to remove.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
LDI2725
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
8-16 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.
Be careful not to let anything get into the
washer nozzle
䊊
D
. This may cause clogging
or improper windshield–washer operation.
If something gets into the nozzle, remove it
with a needle or small pin
䊊
C
.
Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
LDI2710
Do-it-yourself 8-17
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front disc-type brakes self-adjust ev-
ery time the brake pedal is applied. The rear
drum-type brakes self-adjust every time
the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is nor-
mal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information re-
garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-
propriate maintenance schedule informa-
tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger compart-
ment. Spare fuses are provided and can be
found in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
installed in the fuse box securely.
LDI2385
BRAKES FUSES
8-18 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate and the fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links
䊊
A
in the holder. If
any of the fusible links are melted, replace
only with Genuine NISSAN parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible links,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-
perage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover
䊊
A
with a
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam-
aging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-
placed.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
䊊
B
.
LDI2804 LDI2712
Do-it-yourself 8-19
5. If the fuse is open
䊊
C
, replace it with an
equivalent good fuse
䊊
D
.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, remove the extended storage switch
and check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.
How to replace the extended storage
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage
switch, be sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the
OFF position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs
䊊
A
and
䊊
B
found
on each side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out
from the fuse box
䊊
C
.
LDI2713 LDI2747
8-20 Do-it-yourself
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swal-
low the battery or removed parts.
KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the screw
䊊
A
.
SDI2134A
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Do-it-yourself 8-21
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of
the corner
䊊
B
and twist it to separate
the upper part from the lower part. Use
a cloth to protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case
䊊
C
.
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equiva-
lent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw se-
curely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its op-
eration.
If you need assistance for replacement, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
∙ An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always con-
firm local regulations for battery dis-
posal.
∙ The key fob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
∙ The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
8-22 Do-it-yourself
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver
䊊
A
into the slit
䊊
B
of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the
screwdriver to protect the casing.
LDI2001 LDI2637
Do-it-yourself 8-23
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-
ing the battery across the contact
points will seriously deplete the stor-
age capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
䊊
C
and
䊊
D
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the op-
eration.
If you need assistance for replacement, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.
LIGHTS
8-24 Do-it-yourself
Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-
gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside
the engine compartment without remov-
ing the headlight assembly.
CAUTION
∙ High-pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the bulb. The bulb may break if
the glass envelope is scratched or the
bulb is dropped.
∙ Aiming should not be necessary after
replacing the bulb. When aiming ad-
justment is necessary, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. entering the headlight
body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly just before a replacement
bulb is installed.
∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-
lope. Touching the glass could signifi-
cantly affect bulb life and/or head-
light performance.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the rear end of the bulb.
3. Rotate the retaining pin counterclock-
wise to loosen it.
4. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not
shake or rotate the bulb when remov-
ing it.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions out-
lined in this section.
Replacing the fog light bulb
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LDI2240
Do-it-yourself 8-25
CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the perfor-
mance of the fog light.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Headlight assembly
High/Low/Daytime running light
(Canada only)
65/55 HB5
Turn/Position 27/7 3457 AK
Side marker 5 W5W
Fog light (if so equipped)* 35 H8
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —
Map light 5 W5W
Room light 8 —
Cargo light* 5 W5W
High-mounted stop light* — —
Rear combination light*
Turn 21 WY21W
Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W
Backup (reversing) 21 W21W
License plate light* 5 W5W
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-
tion.
*If replacement is required it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
8-26 Do-it-yourself
1. Fog light (if so equipped)
2. Headlight assembly
3. Map light
4. Room light
5. Door mirror turn signal light
(if so equipped)
6. Rear combination light
7. High-mounted stop light
8. Cargo light
9. License plate light
LDI2796
Do-it-yourself 8-27
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
Use a cloth to protect the housing.
SDI1805
Map light
LDI2044
8-28 Do-it-yourself
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely af-
fect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medi-
cal equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit, and the
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message displays in the odometer,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in
the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recom-
mended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is af-
fixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other ob-
jects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if
so equipped) provides visual and au-
dible signals outside the vehicle for
inflating tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure. For additional in-
formation, refer to “TPMS with Easy-
Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely af-
fect tire life and vehicle handling.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Do-it-yourself 8-29
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an
accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capac-
ity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
8-30
Do-it-yourself
Tire and Loading Information
label
䊊
1
Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
䊊
2
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-
hicle loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section.
䊊
3
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
䊊
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are consid-
ered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The rec-
ommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to pro-
vide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-
ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
䊊
5
Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
䊊
6
Spare tire size.
LDI2007
Do-it-yourself 8-31
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, re-
position the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
5.
Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core
of the valve stem briefly with the
tip of the gauge stem to release
pressure. Recheck the pressure
and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
Size Cold Tire Infla-
tion Pressure
Front Original
Tire:
P185/65R15
P195/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Rear Original
Tire:
P185/65R15
P195/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
T125/70D15 420 kPa, 60 PSI
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufac-
turers to place standardized infor-
mation on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and de-
scribes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides the
tire identification number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
LDI0393
Example
WDI0394
8-32 Do-it-yourself
䊊
1
Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles
(not all tires have this informa-
tion).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in milli-
meters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can sup-
port. You may not find this infor-
mation on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
Example
WDI0395
Do-it-yourself 8-33
䊊
2
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-
partment Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
䊊
3
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester and others.
䊊
4
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
䊊
5
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When re-
placing the tires on the vehicle, always
use a tire that has the same load rat-
ing as the factory installed tire.
䊊
6
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
Example
LDI2786
8-34 Do-it-yourself
䊊
7
The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
䊊
8
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
lar side that must always face out-
ward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if so
equipped).
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire wear
and may damage the transmission
and differential gears.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropri-
ate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rat-
ing to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-
ings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, stud-
ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow
tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
cording to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufac-
turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
are designed to meet the minimum clear-
ances between the tire and the closest ve-
hicle suspension or body component re-
quired to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are de-
termined using the factory equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
8-36 Do-it-yourself
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire re-
placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
∙ After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
∙ Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
WDI0258 WDI0259
Do-it-yourself 8-37
∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious per-
sonal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-
ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those rec-
ommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
chain clearance, speedometer cali-
bration, headlight aim and bumper
height. Some of these effects may
lead to accidents and could result in
serious personal injury.
∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving condi-
tions and cause an accident and per-
sonal injury.
∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, de-
grade vehicle handling characteris-
tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-
terference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad wear. For additional information
on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for ap-
proximately one minute. The light will
remain on after one minute. Have
your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-
tem reset as soon as possible. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS (if so
equipped).
8-38 Do-it-yourself
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. Con-
tact a NISSAN dealer for ID
registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-
formation” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-
hicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be re-
placed with the standard tire at the
first opportunity to avoid possible tire
or differential damage.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
Do-it-yourself 8-39
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
8-40 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements......................9-2
General maintenance ........................9-2
Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2
Where to go for service .......................9-2
General maintenance ...........................9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items.........................................9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5
Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6
Maintenance schedules .........................9-7
Additional maintenance items for
severe operating conditions ..................9-7
Standard maintenance..........................9-8
Emission control system maintenance .......9-8
Chassis & body maintenance................9-10
Maintenance under severe operating
conditions......................................9-12
Severe driving conditions ....................9-12
Maintenance log ...............................9-13
Your NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with
long service intervals to save you both time
and money; however, some day-to-day
and regular maintenance is essential to
maintain your NISSAN’s good mechanical
condition as well as its emissions and en-
gine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-
sponsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this sec-
tion are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and corrected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-
cialists who are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through techni-
cal bulletins, service tips and in-dealership
training programs. They are completely
qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles be-
fore they work on your vehicle rather than
after they have worked on it.
You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-
er’s service department performs excellent
service to meet the maintenance require-
ments on your vehicle — in a reliable and
economical way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or mainte-
nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-
nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is re-
leased.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrica-
tion frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and in-
stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-
ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components (if so
equipped): Replace the TPMS transmitter
grommet seal, valve core and cap when
the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-
hicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-
ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-
way speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other dam-
age. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-
diately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so
equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that
the vehicle is held securely with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position without apply-
ing any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate prop-
erly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for serviceable batteries):
Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid
should be at the bottom of the filler open-
ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-
tures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch
fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX
lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level surface with
the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-
ately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-
oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-
mation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these sub-
stances from the underbody, otherwise
rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and exhaust system. At the end of
winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those
areas where mud and dirt may have accu-
mulated. For additional information, refer
to the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform mainte-
nance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-
tervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use
of non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-
ing systems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a NISSAN
product. Many of the aftermarket flushing
systems use non-OEM approved chemi-
cals or solvents, the use of which has not
been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-
vals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replac-
ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mix-
ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may re-
duce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if
valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear-
ance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-
ness. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not re-
quired. (in-tank type filter)
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or re-
place parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the type as originally
equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid
leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam-
aged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-
haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-
structions under “General maintenance” in
this section. When rotating tires, check for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec-
essary.
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
signs of leakage at specified intervals
If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top
carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:
∙ Replace the manual transaxle gear oil
every 20,000 miles or 24 months.
∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to in-
spect the fluid deterioration data using
a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is
more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.
.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-
cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-
nance schedules that may be used, de-
pending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will in-
dicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/
144 months, continue maintenance at
the same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be per-
formed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Addi-
tional maintenance items should be per-
formed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
tures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
and-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
ing for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be re-
quired. After 120,000 miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
25
(40)
30
30
(48)
36
35
(56)
42
40
(64)
48
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Spark plugs (Platinum - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)
STANDARD MAINTENANCE
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
85
(136)
102
90
(144)
108
95
(152)
114
100
(160)
120
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Spark plugs (Platinum - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)
NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 1.35 mm (0.053 in) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
25
(40)
30
30
(48)
36
35
(56)
42
40
(64)
48
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
Brake lines and cables I I I I I I
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝 II I II I
Brake fluid 夝 RRR
CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts
夝
III
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Front drive shaft boots 夝 II I II I
Exhaust system 夝 III
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
85
(136)
102
90
(144)
108
95
(152)
114
100
(160)
120
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
Brakelinesandcables IIIIII
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝 IIIIII
Brake fluid 夝 RRR
CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts 夝
III
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Front drive shaft boots 夝 IIIIII
Exhaust system 夝 III
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.
(1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN dealer every
60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT
fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).
(2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or
24 months.
(3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
The maintenance intervals shown on the
preceding pages are for normal operating
conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated
under severe driving conditions as shown
below, more frequent maintenance must
be performed on the following items as
shown in the table.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
tures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
and-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
ing for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval
Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Brake pads, rotors, drum and lining Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Front drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
MAINTENANCE LOG
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
9-14
Maintenance and schedules
95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
MEMO
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities ......................................10-2
Fuel recommendation.......................10-4
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations ..........................10-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations ....................... 10-7
Specifications ..................................10-8
Engine ......................................10-8
Wheels and tires.............................10-9
Dimensions and weights ....................10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country........................................10-10
Vehicle identification ..........................10-10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate .......................................10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ...........................10-10
Engine serial number........................10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11
Emission control information label ..........10-11
Tire and Loading Information label ......... 10-12
Air conditioner specification label........... 10-12
Installing front license plate.................... 10-13
Vehicle loading information ................... 10-13
Terms ...................................... 10-13
Determining vehicle load capacity ..........10-14
Loading tips ................................10-16
Measurement of weights ...................10-16
Towing a trailer ................................ 10-17
Flat towing ................................. 10-17
Uniform tire quality grading.................... 10-17
Emission control system warranty.............10-18
Reporting safety defects ......................10-19
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test............................................10-20
Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-20
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information ................................... 10-21
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in
this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional information,
refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this
manual
With oil filter
change
3.5 L 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor
oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”
in this section.
Without oil filter
change
3.2 L 3-3/8 qt 2-7/8 qt
Engine coolant
with reservoir
With manual
transmission
6.7 L 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent
With Continu-
ously Variable
Transmission
(CVT)
7.3 L 1-7/8 gal 1-5/8 gal
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent
Manual transmission gear oil — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi
75W-85, or equivalent.
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi is not
available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a tem-
porary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual
Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi as soon as it is available.
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids
other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in
mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-
frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
Air conditioning system oil — — —
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R (KHLOO-PAGRO) or
equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-
frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
Windshield-washer fluid 3.5 L 7/8 gal 3/4 gal
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-
tifreeze or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 10-3
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85.Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and ve-
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-
tent, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-
lated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission con-
trol system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gaso-
line meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-
formulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-
sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use re-
formulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-
erly formulated with appropriate co-
solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle per-
formance problems. At this time, suf-
ficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during re-
fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-
tions require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percent-
age for that region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-
hicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-
nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-
ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, in-
cluding the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more de-
tails.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-
ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
Technical and consumer information 10-5
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recom-
mended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consump-
tion or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-
cation or International Lubricant Standard-
ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.
LTI2051
10-6 Technical and consumer information
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-
ity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using en-
gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-
fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recom-
mended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00-
PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air con-
ditioning system and will require the re-
placement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recov-
ery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service. A
NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians
and equipment needed to recover and re-
cycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.
Technical and consumer information 10-7
ENGINE
Model HR16DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 97.51 (1,598)
Firing order 1–3–4–2
Idle speed
No adjustment is necessary.
M/T
CVT in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO%atidle
Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
10-8 Technical and consumer information
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)
Aluminum and steel 15 x 5.5J 1.57 (40)
Aluminum 16 x 6.0J 1.77 (45)
Tire size P185/65R15
P195/55R16
Spare tire T125/70D15
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Unit: in (mm)
Overall length 163.4 (4,151)
Overall width 66.7 (1,695)
Overall height 60.5 (1,537)
USA
15 inch wheel 60.5 (1,537)
16 inch wheel 60.5 (1,536)
CAN
15 inch wheel 60.6 (1,538)
16 inch wheel 60.5 (1,537)
Front Track width
15 inch wheel 58.3 (1,480)
16 inch wheel 57.9 (1,470)
Rear Track width
15 inch wheel 58.5 (1,485)
16 inch wheel 58.1 (1,475)
Wheelbase 102.4 (2,600)
Gross vehicle
weight rating
lbs. (kg)
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer-
tification label” on the center pillar
between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front lbs. (kg)
Rear lbs. (kg)
Technical and consumer information 10-9
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gaso-
line vehicles must be operated with un-
leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, prov-
ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-
tions may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation and registration are the re-
sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-
sponsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is lo-
cated as shown.
LTI2050 LTI2274
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
10-10 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-
cation label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.
HR16DE engine
LTI2020
WTI0172 LTI2004
Technical and consumer information 10-11
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is af-
fixed as shown.
LTI2251 LTI2067
10-12 Technical and consumer information
Before mounting the license plate, confirm
the following parts are enclosed in the
plastic bag:
– License plate bracket
– License plate bracket screws x2
Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate:
1. Hold the license plate bracket and
mount the license plate bracket using
the two screws to the fascia.
WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a ve-
hicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-
cluding: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.
LTI2319
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 10-13
∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other op-
tional equipment. This informa-
tion is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
sengers, cargo, and trailer.
∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maxi-
mum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information la-
bel.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.
DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD
CAPACITY
The load capacity of this vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. For example, a lug-
gage rack, bike carrier, car-top car-
rier or similar equipment does not
increase load carrying capacity of
your vehicle.
To determine vehicle load capacity:
Vehicle weight can be determined
by using a commercial-grade scale,
found at places such as a truck stop,
gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a
scrap metal recycling facility.
1. Determine the curb weight of
your vehicle.
2. Compare the curb weight
amount to the GVWR specified
for your vehicle to determine
how much more weight your ve-
hicle can carry.
3. After loading (cargo and pas-
sengers), re-weigh your vehicle
to determine if either GVWR or
GAWR for your vehicle is ex-
ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, re-
move cargo as necessary. If ei-
ther the front or rear GAWR is
exceeded, shift the load or re-
move cargo as necessary.
10-14
Technical and consumer information
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information la-
bel.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your ve-
hicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
Example
LTI2335
Technical and consumer information 10-15
5.
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Measure-
ment of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label” in this section.
LOADING TIPS
∙
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
∙ Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can also cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire fail-
ure which could result in a seri-
ous accident and personal in-
jury. Failures caused by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle.When the ve-
hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight
ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle cer-
tification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
10-16
Technical and consumer information
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
hicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-
hicle with the front tires on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing).
Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans-
mission parts due to lack of transmis-
sion lubrication.
∙ For emergency towing procedures re-
fer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
Manual Transmission (if so
equipped)
∙ Always tow with the manual transmis-
sion in N (Neutral).
∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start
and idle the engine with the transmis-
sion in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Fail-
ure to idle the engine after every
500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause
damage to internal transmission parts.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (if so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-
ously variable transmission, an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions when using their product.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-
ity Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Technical and consumer information 10-17
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include ac-
celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the mini-
mum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly in-
flated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-
lowing emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-
ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-
ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
10-18 Technical and consumer information
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a re-
call and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other in-
formation about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contact-
ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign. However, Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-
sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online
at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be
obtained from Transport Canada’s
Road Safety Information Centre at
1-800-333-0371 or online at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English
speakers) or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety con-
cerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800-
387-0122.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Technical and consumer information 10-19
Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-
hicle.
If a powertrain system component is re-
paired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-
tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-
tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-
dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a ve-
hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-
signed to record data related to vehicle dy-
namics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
cord such data as:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better un-
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash in-
vestigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
10-20 Technical and consumer information
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-
chased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genu-
ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genu-
ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-
resentative will assist you.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 10-21
MEMO
10-22 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) .....................1-44
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bagsystem)................1-54
Air bag warning labels ............1-62
Airbagwarninglight.........1-62, 2-20
Air bag warning light,
supplemental ..............1-62, 2-20
Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-15
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ........4-31
Air conditioner service..........4-36
Air conditioner specification label . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations .......10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations ............10-7
Heater and air conditioner
controls ..................4-28
Servicing air conditioner ........4-36
Air flow charts.................4-32
Anchor point locations............1-27
Antenna ....................4-75
Antifreeze ...................5-34
Anti-lock brake warning light........2-15
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-29
Apps.......................4-76
Armrests.....................1-5
Around View® Monitor ............4-17
Audible reminders ..............2-23
Audiosystem.................4-36
AMradioreception............4-37
Bluetooth® audio ..........4-71, 4-72
Compact disc (CD)
player.............4-47,4-52,4-60
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player....................4-45
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player ................4-49,4-54
FMradioreception............4-36
iPod®Player.............4-65,4-68
iPod® player operation ......4-65,4-68
Radio ....................4-36
Steering wheel audio control
switch....................4-74
USBinterface............4-61,4-63
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port..................4-61,4-63
Automatic
Automatic power window switch. . .2-42
Automatic door locks .............3-7
AUXjack.................4-48,4-61
B
Battery..................5-34,8-11
Charge warning light...........2-16
Battery replacement.............8-21
Keyfob................8-21,8-21
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........8-23
Before starting the engine .........5-14
Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-14
Bluetooth® audio ............4-71, 4-72
Bluetooth® hands-free phone
system ..............4-81,4-96,4-108
Bluetooth® streaming audio with
NavigationSystem..............4-72
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) ....4-71
Booster seats .................1-41
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-29
Brakefluid..................8-9
Brakelight(Seestoplight).......8-26
Brakesystem...............5-29
Brakewarninglight............2-15
Brakewearindicators.......2-23,8-18
Parking brake operation.........5-21
Self-adjustingbrakes..........8-18
Brakeassist..................5-30
Brakefluid....................8-9
Brakes......................8-18
Brakesystem.................5-29
Break-in schedule ..............5-24
Brightness/contrast button .........4-9
Brightness control
Instrument panel.............2-29
Bulb check/instrument panel .......2-15
Bulb replacement ..............8-26
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants....................10-2
Cargocover...................2-39
Cargo (See vehicle loading information)
. .10-13
Car phone or CB radio ............4-81
CDcareandcleaning.............4-73
CD player (See audio system)
. .4-47, 4-52, 4-60
Checking bulbs.................2-15
Childrestraints........1-20, 1-21, 1-23, 1-25
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren)System..............1-25
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Top tether strap anchor point
locations...................1-27
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-27
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-8
Chimes, audible reminders .........2-23
Cleaningexteriorandinterior......7-2,7-4
Clock setting (models with Navigation
System) ...................4-7,4-9
Clock setting (models without Navigation
System)...........4-46,4-50,4-51,4-51
Clutch
Clutchfluid.................8-10
C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11
Coldweatherdriving.............5-34
Compact disc (CD) player....4-47,4-52,4-60
Connect phone ................4-76
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............5-9,5-15
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid......................8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ..........5-9,5-15
Control panel buttons .............4-4
Brightness/contrast button .......4-9
Settingbutton................4-7
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel).....4-74
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-28
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine coolant .........8-5
Checking engine coolant level ......8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Corrosionprotection..............7-7
Cruisecontrol.................5-22
Cupholders...................2-36
Curtain side-impact and rollover
airbag......................1-59
D
Daytime running light system
(Canada only)..................2-29
Defroster switch
Rearwindowdefrosterswitch.....2-27
Dimensions and weights...........10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-29
Display controls
(see control panel buttons) ..........4-4
Door locks ..................3-5,3-6
Door open warning light ...........2-16
Drivebelt ....................8-14
Driving
Cold weather driving ...........5-34
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ..........5-9,5-15
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-20
Precautions when starting and
driving .....................5-2
Driving the vehicle ...............5-15
E
Economy - fuel.................5-26
Emergency engine shutoff..........5-13
Emission control information label . . . .10-11
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-18
Engine
Before starting the engine ........5-14
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine coolant .........8-5
Changing engine oil ............8-7
Changing engine oil filter .........8-8
Checking engine coolant level ......8-5
Checking engine oil level .........8-6
Engine compartment check
locations...................8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Engine cooling system ..........8-4
Engine oil ...................8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation .............
10-6
Engine oil pressure warning light. . . .2-16
Engine oil viscosity.............10-7
Engine serial number...........10-11
Engine specifications ...........10-8
Starting the engine ............5-14
Engine Block Heater .............5-35
11-2
Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-9
EventDatarecorders............10-20
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2
Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items.......................9-5
Extended storage switch ..........8-20
F
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) ....6-2
Flattire....................6-3,6-3
Floormatpositioningaid...........7-6
Fluid
Brakefluid..................8-9
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Clutchfluid.................8-10
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid......................8-9
Engine coolant ...............8-4
Engine oil ...................8-6
F.M.V.S.S. certification label..........10-11
Foglightswitch ................2-31
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-54
Front-door pocket...............2-34
Frontseats....................1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Fuel economy ...............5-26
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-28
Fuel gauge .................2-10
Fueloctanerating.............10-5
Fuel recommendation ..........10-4
Loose fuel cap warning .......2-7,3-29
Fuel efficient driving tips ...........5-25
Fuel-filler door .................3-28
Fuel gauge ...................2-10
Fuses .......................8-18
Fusiblelinks...................8-19
G
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Fuel gauge .................2-10
Odometer ..................2-6
Speedometer ................2-5
Tachometer .................2-8
Trip computer................2-11
Trip odometer ................2-6
General maintenance .............9-2
Glovebox....................2-36
H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetooth®............4-81,4-96,4-108
Hazard warning flasher switch........6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch......2-28
Headlightcontrolswitch...........2-28
Headlights...................8-24
Headrestraints .................1-6
Heatedseats..................2-32
Heated seat switches ............2-32
Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-28
Heater operation .............4-30
Hood release ..................3-26
Horn.......................2-31
I
Ignition switch ..................5-8
Push-button ignition switch .......5-10
Immobilizer system .......2-24,5-10,5-14
Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11
Increasing fuel economy...........5-26
Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator...................5-13
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) ................2-14,2-20
Instrument brightness control .......2-29
Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-29
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range............
3-14
Key operation ................3-15
Mechanical key ...............3-4
Remote keyless entry operation. .3-9, 3-18
Troubleshooting guide.......3-24,3-25
Warning signals ...........3-24,3-25
Interiorlight...............2-42,2-43
iPod®Player...............4-65,4-68
ISOFIX child restraints.............1-25
11-3
J
Jumpstarting..............6-12,8-13
K
Key.........................3-2
Key fob battery replacement .....8-21,8-21
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system).....3-9,3-18
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......3-3,3-12
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys......................3-5
L
Label
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-11
Emission control information label . .10-11
Engine serial number...........10-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label........10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate.....................10-10
Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-62
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren)System................1-25
License plate
Installing the license plate .......10-13
Light
Airbagwarninglight........1-62, 2-20
Brakelight(Seestoplight)........8-26
Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-15
Bulb replacement .............8-26
Charge warning light ...........2-16
ExteriorandInteriorlights........8-26
Foglights..................8-25
Foglightswitch ..............2-31
Headlight and turn signal switch....2-28
Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-28
Headlights.................8-24
Interiorlight.............2-42,2-43
Lightbulbs.................8-24
Low tire pressure warning light .....2-17
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light......................2-19
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-54
Security indicator light ..........2-22
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...............2-14,2-20
Lights......................8-24
Lock
Child safety rear door lock ........3-8
Door locks ................3-5,3-6
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-28
Power door locks ..............3-7
Loose fuel cap warning .........2-7,3-29
Lowfuelwarninglight.............2-17
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-17
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light........................2-19
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) .....10-13
M
Maintenance
General maintenance ...........9-2
Insidethevehicle..............9-3
Maintenance precautions.........8-2
Outsidethevehicle.............9-2
Seat belt maintenance ..........1-19
Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4
Maintenance log ................9-13
Maintenance requirements..........9-2
Maintenance schedules ............9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions....................9-12
Malfunctionindicatorlight..........2-21
Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3
Manual windows................2-42
Meters and gauges...............2-3
Instrument brightness control .....2-29
Mirror
Outsidemirrors..............3-33
Rearview...................3-32
Vanitymirror................3-32
Mirrors......................3-32
Mobile apps...................4-76
N
NissanConnect® ................4-76
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........3-3,3-12
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator.....................5-13
NISS
AN Vehicle Immobilizer
System...............2-24,5-10,5-14
NISSAN voice recognition system .....4-118
11-4
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5
Odometer ....................2-6
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine oil ............8-7
Changing engine oil filter .........8-8
Checking engine oil level .........8-6
Engine oil ...................8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation .............10-6
Engine oil viscosity.............10-7
One shot call ...........4-85,4-98,4-111
Outsidemirrors................3-33
Overheat
Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-14
Owner's manual order form ........10-21
Owner's manual/service manual order
information ..................10-21
P
Parking
Parking brake operation .........5-21
Parking/parkingonhills.........5-27
Parkingbrake..................5-21
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free
system ..............4-81,4-96,4-108
Power
Power door locks ..............3-7
Poweroutlet................2-33
Powerrearwindows ...........2-41
Power steering system .........5-28
Powerwindows..............2-40
Rearpowerwindows...........2-41
Poweroutlet..................2-33
Powersteering.................5-28
Precautions
Maintenance precautions.........8-2
Precautions on booster
seats............1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-10
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-44
Precautions when starting and
driving.....................5-2
Programmable features ............4-7
Push starting ..................6-14
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio ..........4-81
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player....................4-45
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player.................4-49,4-54
Steering wheel audio control
switch....................4-74
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test.......................10-20
Rearcenterseatbelt .............1-16
Rearpowerwindows.............2-41
Rearseat.....................1-4
Rearviewmirror................3-32
RearViewMonitor...............4-10
Rearwindowdefrosterswitch.......2-27
Rear window wiper and washer
switches.....................2-26
Recommended Fluids ............10-2
Recorders
EventData.................10-20
Refrigerant recommendation ........10-7
Registering a vehicle in another
country .....................10-10
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock ........3-8
Childseatbelts......1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-19
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment ......1-3
Rear seat adjustment ...........1-4
Seatback pockets ...............2-35
Seat belt
Childsafety.................1-20
Infants and small children ........1-21
I
njuredPerson................1-13
Largerchildren...............1-21
Precautionsonseatbeltusage.....1-10
Pregnant women..............1-13
Rearcenterseatbelt ...........1-16
Seat belt extenders ............1-19
Seat belt maintenance ..........1-19
Seatbelts................1-10, 7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19
Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-13
Seat belt extenders ..............1-19
11-5
Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-13, 2-20
Seats
Adjustment ..................1-2
Armrests...................1-5
Frontseats..................1-2
Heatedseats................2-32
Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3
Rearseat...................1-4
Security indicator light ............2-22
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start.......2-24,5-10,5-14
Self-adjustingbrakes.............8-18
Service manual order form .........10-21
Servicing air conditioner ...........4-36
Settingbutton..................4-7
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .....................5-17
Manual transmission ...........5-20
Shiftleverlockrelease............5-18
Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-19
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
systems) .....................1-59
Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-77
Smartphone connectivity ..........4-76
Spark plug replacement ...........8-15
Spark plugs ...................8-15
Specifications .................10-8
Speedometer ..................2-5
SRS warning label ...............1-62
Stability control.................5-31
Standard maintenance ............9-8
Starting
Before starting the engine ........5-14
Jumpstarting............6-12,8-13
Precautions when starting and
driving.....................5-2
Push starting ................6-14
Starting the engine ............5-14
Starting the engine ..............5-14
Steering
Powersteeringsystem .........5-28
Tilting steering wheel ...........3-31
Steering wheel .................3-31
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-74
Stoplight....................8-26
Storage.....................2-34
Storagetray ..................2-35
Sunvisors....................3-31
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-62
Supplemental air bag warning
light....................1-62, 2-20
Supplemental front impact air bag
system ......................1-54
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . .1-62
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-44
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-44
Switch
Automatic power window switch . . .2-42
Foglightswitch ..............2-31
Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch....2-28
Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-28
Ignition switch ................5-8
Instrument brightness control .....2-29
Power door lock switch ..........3-7
Rearwindowdefrosterswitch.....2-27
Rear window wiper and washer
switches...................2-26
Turn signal switch .............2-30
V
ehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch....................2-33
T
Tachometer ...................2-8
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start ............2-24,5-10,5-14
Three-waycatalyst...............5-2
Tilting steering wheel .............3-31
Tire
Flattire..................6-3,6-3
Spare tire ...............6-4,8-39
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Tire chains .................8-36
Tire pressure ................8-29
Tirerotation.................8-37
Types of tires ................8-35
Uniform tire quality grading.......10-17
Wheels and tires...........8-29,10-9
Wheel/tire size ...............10-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light .....2-17
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3
Toptetherstrapchildrestraint.......1-27
Towing
2-wheel drive models........6-16,6-17
Flattowing.................10-17
Towtrucktowing .............6-15
Trailertowing ...............10-17
11-6
Towingatrailer................10-17
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid......................8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ..........5-9,5-15
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-20
Transmission shift lever lock release . . .5-18
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country).....................10-10
Trip computer..................2-11
Trip odometer ..................2-6
Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice
recognition system) .............4-122
Turn signal switch ...............2-30
U
Uniform tire quality grading.........10-17
USBinterface ..............4-61,4-63
Audio file operation ........4-62,4-64
V
Vanitymirror..................3-32
Variable voltage control system ......8-14
Vehicle dimensions and weights ......10-9
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch......................2-33
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-31
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-31
Vehicle identification .............10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) ...............10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate.......................10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system . .2-24, 5-10, 5-14
Vehicle loading information .....10-13,10-14
Vehiclerecovery................6-17
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), engine
start.................2-24,5-10,5-14
Ventilators ...................4-28
Visors.......................3-31
Voice Prompt Interrupt
. .4-85, 4-98, 4-99, 4-111
Voice recognition system ..........4-118
W
Warning
Airbagwarninglight........1-62, 2-20
Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-15
Battery charge warning light ......2-16
Brakewarninglight............2-15
Door open warning light .........2-16
Engine oil pressure warning light....2-16
Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2
Loose fuel cap warning .......2-7,3-29
Lowfuelwarninglight...........2-17
Lowtirepressurewarninglight.....2-17
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light......................2-19
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-54
Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-13, 2-20
Supplemental air bag warning
light..................1-62, 2-20
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...............2-14,2-20
Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-62
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders.................2-14, 2-20
Audible reminders .........2-14,2-20
Checking bulbs...............2-15
Indicatorlights............2-14, 2-20
Warninglights............2-14,2-20
Warninglights..............2-14,2-20
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders ....................2-14
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches...................2-26
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9
Wheels and tires.............8-29,10-9
Wheel/tire size .................10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country .....................10-10
Windows ....................2-40
Locking passengers' windows .....2-41
Manual windows..............2-42
Powerrearwindows ...........2-41
Powerwindows..............2-40
Rearpowerwindows...........2-41
Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-10
Windshield wiper blades ...........8-16
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches...................2-26
Wiper blades ................8-16
Wiper and washer switch ..........2-25
11-7
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-
dex) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85.Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙
Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely af-
fect vehicle performance and vehicle
emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are
labeled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline re-
tailer for more details. Note that Fed-
eral and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is
recommended.
• If the above motor is not available, use an
equivalent motor oil that matches the
above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
E12-D
Printing : October 2017
Publication No.:
Printed in U.S.A.
OM18EM 0E12U1
‘18
